Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction
Safety and environment protection
4
4
Vehicle Inspection Guide
11
Instrument Cluster
22
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
22
28
Entertainment Systems
33
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Climate Controls
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Interior lamps
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
33
40
46
46
47
49
49
50
51
51
54
54
54
56
57
59
1
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
Keys
Locks
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Child restraints
Driving
64
64
64
65
65
69
79
91
Starting
Brakes
Air suspension
Transmission operation
Vehicle loading
91
99
120
122
136
Roadside Emergencies
142
Hazard flasher switch
Fuses and relays
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
143
143
151
155
Customer Assistance
159
Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada
Ordering additional owner’s literature
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
Cleaning
Cleaning your vehicle
Repairing paint chips
Underbody preservation
2
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
161
162
162
163
164
164
164
167
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Hood
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Wheel lug nut torque
Tire information
Lubricant specifications
Refill capacities
169
177
180
180
183
184
210
210
218
230
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
235
Index
270
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
3
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
4
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Truck Limited Warranty includes Basic Coverage, Corrosion
Coverage, Frame Coverage, Federal Emissions Defect Warranty and
California Defects Warranty. For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
5
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle - event data recorders - are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
6
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
7
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
9
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION REGULATION
Regulations such as those issued by the Federal Highway Administration
or issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA),
and/or state and local laws and regulations may require additional
equipment for the way you intend to use the vehicle. It is the
responsibility of the registered owner to determine the applicability of
such laws and regulations to your intended use for the vehicle, and to
arrange for the installation of required equipment. Your dealer has
information about the availability of equipment which may be ordered for
your vehicle.
ENTERING, EXITING AND/OR CLIMBING ON THIS VEHICLE
You must be careful and deliberate to minimize the possibility of personal
injury from a slip and fall when entering, exiting and/or climbing on this
vehicle. Always use the steps and assist handles before climbing. Do not
skip any steps or assist handles. Use three point contact at all times with
at least two feet and one hand or two hands and one foot firmly placed
during all phases of entering, exiting and/or climbing. Always keep your
shoe soles and hands clean. Keep the steps and assist handles free of
snow, ice, oil, grease, substances or debris. Be sure to use extra care in
bad weather. Avoid wearing thick gloves. Always perform trailer hook-up
while standing on the ground.
WARNING: Do not carry items while entering, exiting, and/or
climbing. Make sure you keep a firm grip. Always FACE the
VEHICLE STEP and HANDLE SYSTEM while climbing up and down.
Do not climb behind the cab unless you have three point contact with
a step and handle system at all times.
10
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
To be sure your vehicle is ready to operate, conduct a pre-trip inspection
at the beginning of each work period. Follow the steps listed in this
section to ensure a proper vehicle inspection procedure. The pages in
this section may be produced locally and used on a regular basis.
VEHICLE INSPECTION INFORMATION
Note: Always make sure the parking brake is applied before starting the
engine.
Engine compartment (with engine stopped)
Engine oil level:
Use the engine oil dipstick to verify that the
engine oil level is between the ADD and
OPERATING RANGE marks.
Engine coolant
Look through the plastic reservoir or the clear
level:
sight glass on the reservoir, depending upon
vehicle equipment, and make sure the fluid is
within the minimum and maximum fluid level
range as marked on the reservoir. Do not
remove pressure cap until the coolant has
cooled.
Power steering fluid: Verify that the fluid level is in the proper
operating range. Refer to Power steering
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
Brake fluid (master Remove the master cylinder caps and inspect
cylinder):
the fluid level. The full mark is at the bottom
of the opening of the fluid ports.
Hydraulic clutch
Check for adequate amount of hydraulic clutch
fluid:
fluid. Fluid level should be at the step of the
reservoir; refer to Clutch fluid/linkage
adjustments in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Belts (Fan,
Check for glazing, fraying or cracking. There
should be no more than five - seven cracks per
alternator, water
rib per inch (2.5 cm).
pump and A/C
compressor):
11
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Engine compartment (with engine stopped)
Check for signs of fluid puddles, dripping fluid
on the ground under the engine or the
underside of the engine.
HVAC air inlet:
Check for debris, leaves, etc. that may have
collected on the HVAC air inlet grille or inside
the exterior module as this may cause reduced
system performance.
Any leaks:
WARNING: Exercise great caution when working on vehicle
equipped with an automatic fan clutch. The fan starts in motion
only after the engine coolant reaches a predetermined temperature or
the refrigerant pressure (if equipped with air conditioning) reaches a
predetermined setting. The fan will start at this point with no advance
warning. Never reach near, or permit objects to protrude into, the fan
blade radius while the engine is running as this could result in vehicle
damage, personal injury or death.
12
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Engine starting (parking brake applied)
Safety/Emergency
Prior to entering the cab, verify that the
equipment:
vehicle is equipped with spare electrical fuses
(if used), three red reflective triangles, a
properly charged and rated fire extinguisher
and wheel chocks. Walk around the vehicle
and check that all steps and grab handles,
inside and out as well as behind, are tight and
clean. Use extreme caution and a three-point
stance at all times. Check door latches for
positive closing, latching and locking.
Starting the engine: Verify the parking brake is set. Press the
clutch (if equipped with a manual
transmission) and verify the transmission is in
neutral. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission should be in N (Neutral) or P
(Park) if equipped with a Park position.
Turn the key to the on position. When the
WAIT TO START indicator light in the
instrument cluster turns off, turn the key to
START.
Oil pressure builds: Make sure engine oil pressure is building to
normal operating range.
Air chime sounds (if The low air pressure warning chime should
equipped with air
sound immediately after the engine starts but
compressor):
before the compressor has built up pressure.
The low air pressure warning chime should
stop when the air pressure reaches 70 psi
(483 kPa) (or more). Let the air pressure
build to governed cut-out pressure, which
should occur between 115–130 psi
(793–896 kPa).
13
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Engine starting (parking brake applied)
Press the accelerator and verify that it
operates smoothly without any binding or
irregular feel. Remove your foot from the
pedal and make sure the engine returns to idle
speed immediately.
Ammeter/Voltmeter: Check the gauge to see if the alternator is
charging.
Steering linkage
Check for excessive free play in the steering
free play:
linkages. The steering wheel should have less
than two inches (five cm) of free play at rim
of steering wheel.
Full Power
With the ignition off or in the run position,
Hydraulic brake
pump the brake pedal several times, the
check:
motor/pumps will be heard momentarily
replenishing the accumulators.
Parking brake:
Check that the parking brake will hold the
vehicle by gently trying to pull forward with
the parking brake applied.
Accelerator:
14
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Engine starting (parking brake applied)
Air brake check:
Check the air brakes in the following manner
(Chock the wheels, if necessary. Push in the
parking brake and on tractors, also push in the
tractor parking brake knob):
1. Check the that air compressor or governor
cut-out pressure is approximately 120 psi
(827 kPa).
2. Turn off the engine and turn the key back
to the on position, without starting the engine.
3. Without the brake pedal applied, note the
air pressure drop for one minute. It should be
less than 2 psi (14 kPa) for single vehicle and
3 psi (21 kPa) for combination vehicles.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal with 90 psi
(621 kPa) or more and make sure there is no
more than a 3 psi (21 kPa) per minute leak;
for combination vehicles, no more than 4 psi
(28 kPa) per minute.
5. Pump the brake pedal to deplete the system
of air pressure. The warning light and chime
should activate at 57 psi (393 kPa).
6. Pump the brake pedal and make sure the
parking brake and trailer parking brake knobs
pop out at 20 psi (138 kPa) or higher.
Automatic
With the engine idling at normal operating
transmission fluid:
temperature and the parking brake applied,
check the automatic transmission fluid. If fluid
needs to be added, place the transmission in
the appropriate gear as specified in the
transmission operator’s manual and refer to
Transmission fluid in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
15
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Lights:
Steering gear:
Steering linkage:
Tow hooks:
Spring:
Spring mount:
Shock absorber:
Front of vehicle
Make sure all lights illuminate and are clean.
Make sure headlights function on both high
and low beams. Make sure reflectors are clean
and unbroken and of proper color (red on
rear, amber elsewhere). Make sure the running
lights are also clean and unbroken.
Look for missing or loose fasteners, power
steering fluid leaks and damage to power
steering hoses.
Make sure connecting links, arms and rods are
not worn or cracked; joints, sockets and boot
seals are not worn or loose and that there are
no loose or missing cotter keys, nuts or bolts.
Front and rear tow hooks should be inspected
for damage or loose mounting. This is
particularly important on vehicles where tow
hooks are frequently used.
Front suspension
Inspect for missing, broken or shifted leaves or
leaves that are in contact, or nearly contacting
a tire, rim, brake drum, frame or body
component.
Inspect spring hangers, bolts, bushings, axle
mounting bolts and nuts for cracks, breaks,
wear, damage and tightness.
Inspect for cracks, leaks and missing or broken
bolts or bushings.
Note: Never apply grease to spring pads.
WARNING: Do not operate the vehicle if any suspension
conditions listed in the Front suspension chart are evident.
Loss of steering or suspension could result in property damage,
personal injury or death.
16
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Hoses:
Chambers:
Slack adjuster:
Drum:
Rims:
Lug nuts:
Hub oil seal:
Oil-lubricated front
wheel bearing:
Front brakes
Check for cracked, worn or frayed hoses. Make
sure all couplings are secured.
Make sure brake chambers are not cracked or
dented and that they are securely mounted.
Check for broken, loose or missing parts. The
angle between the push rod and adjuster arm
should be approximately 90° when the brakes
are applied. When pulled by hand, the push
rod should not move more than approximately
one inch (2.5 cm).
Make sure there are no cracks, dents or holes
and no loose or missing bolts. Make sure brake
linings are not worn, dangerously thin or
contaminated by lubricant.
Front wheels
Check for damaged or bent rims. Rims should
not have welding repairs and no rust trails that
indicate it is loose on the wheel.
Make sure all lug nuts are present and not
loose (look for rust trails around the lug nuts).
There should be no cracks radiating from the
lug bolt holes or distortion of the bolt holes.
Check wheel hub oil seal for leaks, and if sight
glass if present, check to see that the oil level
is adequate.
If the hubcap has a transparent window, check
for proper lubrication level. If the hubcap does
not have a transparent window, remove the
rubber fill-plug and check for proper level.
WARNING: If a wheel must be changed, obtain expert tire
service help. Mounting and un-mounting of tires should only be
performed by a qualified technician using necessary safety procedures
and equipment, otherwise the result could be property damage,
personal injury or death.
17
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Fuel tank(s):
Leaks:
Driveshaft:
Exhaust system:
Frame:
Driver/Fuel area
Make sure the fuel tank(s) and cap(s) are
secure. Make sure there is no damage to the
tank(s).
Check for any leaks from the fuel tank(s).
Underbody of vehicle
Make sure that the driveshaft is not bent or
cracked. Ensure all driveshaft couplings are
secure.
Make sure the outside visible parts are
securely mounted. Make sure there are no
cracks, holes or severe dents.
Check for cracks or bends in longitudinal
frame members. Make sure there are no loose,
cracked, bent, broken or missing
crossmembers or crossmember fasteners.
WARNING: Maintain adequate clearance between all parts of
the exhaust system and all hoses, wires and lines for engine
cooling, brake system, fuel system, power steering system and
electrical system, Heat damage to hoses, wires or lines may cause
vehicle malfunction that could result in property damage, personal
injury or death.
18
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Air/Electric lines:
Deck plate:
Signal/Brake lights:
Lights, reflectors:
Mounting bolts:
Platform:
Safety latch:
Release arm:
Rear of vehicle
Make sure that air hoses are not cut, cracked,
chafed or worn. Listen for audible air leaks,
Make sure air and electrical lines are not
tangled, crimped or pinched or being dragged
against any truck parts. Electrical line insulation
should not be cut, cracked, chafed or worn.
None of the air or electrical line should be
spliced or taped. Check for corrosion on pins
and in electrical sockets to ensure continuity
and reduced heat build-up potential.
Make sure deck plate is clean, securely bolted
to the frame and clear of loose objects.
Make sure both brake lights illuminate when the
brake pedal is applied. Also, make sure each
signal flashes. Make sure that four-way flashers
work properly.
Make sure all lights illuminate and are clean.
Make sure headlights function on both high and
low beams. Make sure reflectors are clean and
unbroken and of proper color (red on rear,
amber elsewhere). Make sure the running lights
are also clean and unbroken. Rear running lights
must be checked separately from signal, flasher
and brake lights.
Tractor - coupling system
Check for loose or missing mounting brackets,
clamps, bolts or nuts. Both fifth wheel and slide
mounting must be solidly attached.
Check for cracks or breaks in the platform
structure.
Make sure safety latch is engaged.
Make sure safety latch is in the engaged
position and that any safety latch is in place.
19
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Kingpin/Apron:
Springs:
Spring mounts:
Torsion, shocks:
Hoses:
Chambers:
Slack adjuster:
Drum:
Tractor - coupling system
Make sure kingpin is not bent or worn. Also
make sure that the apron lies flat on the fifth
wheel skid plate and that the visible part of the
apron is not bent, worn, cracked or broken.
Rear suspension
Check for broken or shifted leaves or leaves
that are in contact, or nearly contacting a tire,
rim, brake drum, frame or body component.
Check for missing or broken leaves in the leaf
spring.
Check for cracked or broken spring hangers,
broken, missing or loose bolts, missing or
damaged bushings, broken, loose or missing
axle mounting parts.
Make sure torsion arm is not cracked, broken
or missing. Check the shock absorber for
cracks or leaks; there should be no missing or
broken mounting bolts or worn bushings.
Rear brakes
Checked for cracked, worn or frayed hoses.
Make sure all couplings are secured.
Make sure brake chambers are not cracked or
dented and that they are securely mounted.
Check for broken, loose or missing parts. The
angle between the push rod and adjuster arm
should be approximately 90° when the brakes
are applied. When pulled by hand, the push
rod should not move more than approximately
one inch (2.5 cm).
Make sure there are no cracks, dents or holes
and no loose or missing bolts. Make sure brake
linings are not worn, dangerously thin or
contaminated by lubricant.
20
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Inspection Guide
Spacers:
Rims:
Lug nuts:
Rear wheels
Make sure dual wheels are evenly separated
and that tires are not touching one another.
Check for damaged or bent rims. Rims should
not have welding repairs and no rust trails that
indicate it is loose on the wheel.
Make sure all lug nuts are present and not
loose (look for rust trails around the lug nuts).
There should be no cracks radiating from the
lug bolt holes or distortion of the bolt holes.
Trailer
If you are pulling a trailer, an inspection of the trailer similar to that of
the tractor should be done. Such an inspection should follow trailer
manufacturer recommendations and should include at a minimum:
general condition, landing gear, doors, sides, lights, reflectors,
suspension, brakes, tires, wheels, cargo placement, stability and
tie-downs.
Transmission
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, regularly
check the transmission’s neutral start switch. The engine should only
start in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) positions.
WARNING: If the unit starts in gear and/or the neutral start
switch is not functioning correctly, the vehicle may inadvertently
move which could result in property damage, personal injury or death.
Check the transmission fluid level and shift linkage for proper operation.
21
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Some of the warning lights shown are optional based on vehicle
equipment; your vehicle may not have some of the warning lights shown
in this section.
Service engine soon: If this light
SERVICE
illuminates while driving, it is a
ENGINE
possible indication that one of the
SOON
engine’s emission control systems
has failed.
Check suspension (if equipped):
Illuminates when the air suspension
dump switch has been activated.
22
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Stop engine: This light is used in
STOP
conjunction with the electronic
ENGINE
engine control. When illuminated,
the STOP ENGINE lamp indicates the need to stop the engine as soon
as it can be safely done.
If the STOP ENGINE lamp begins flashing, automatic engine
shutdown may take place in as little as 20 seconds.
WARNING: In the event of engine shutdown, make sure the
vehicle is safely off the road and the problem is remedied prior
to returning to the road. Failure to remove the vehicle from the road
could result in an accident, causing serious injury or death.
Refer to your engine operator’s manual for specific information regarding
this feature.
If the engine shuts down, it can be restarted and operated for
30 seconds at a time or until the problem is corrected. For more
information, refer to Engine automatic shutdown warning light or
chime (if equipped) in the Driving chapter of this owner guide and/or
your engine operator’s manual.
Drivers of electronically controlled engines should know the
extent of warning engine shutdown system before operating the
vehicle.
23
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, this light will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running. If
the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek
service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after starting the
vehicle indicates a brake system fault and should be inspected
immediately by your dealership.
Note: The Brake System Warning light may be accompanied by a
warning buzzer or chime.
If equipped with an air brake system, the warning light stays on until
the air pressure builds up to 60 psi (414 kPa). If the air pressure drops
below 60 psi (414 kPa) during operation, the remaining brake system is
still operational but the stopping distance will be greater.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Wait to start: Indicates the air
intake heater is in operation and
special starting procedures are
required. Refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter.
WAIT
TO
START
WARNING: If equipped with an air intake heater, DO NOT use
ether or any other starting fluids. The use of starting fluids
(ether) in an engine equipped with an air intake heater could result in
damage and/or personal injury.
24
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Water in fuel: During refueling, it
WATER
is possible for water-contaminated
IN
diesel fuel to be pumped into your
FUEL
tank. Your vehicle fuel system is
equipped with a fuel filter/water
separator to remove water from the fuel. The WATER IN FUEL light will
illuminate when the fuel filter/water separator has a significant quantity
of water in it.
If the light illuminates when the engine is running, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible, shut off the engine, then drain the fuel
filter/water separator. Refer to your engine operator’s manual for the
drain procedure. Allowing water to stay in the system could result in
extensive damage to, or failure of, the fuel injection system.
WARNING: Do not drain water separator while engine is
running. Fuel may ignite if separator is drained while engine is
running or vehicle is moving.
Traction control (if equipped):
Illuminates and flashes slowly if the
Off Road or Mud/Snow mode is
selected and flashes rapidly during a
traction control event.
Differential lock: Illuminates when
the main differential is locked
(engaged).
Parking brake warning:
BRAKE
Momentarily illuminates when the
ignition is turned to the on position
and the engine is off. Also
illuminates when the parking brake
is engaged. If the parking brake
warning lamp does not illuminate at
these times, seek service immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Power Park Parking Brake option: If
after setting the parking brake on your vehicle the park brake warning
lamp begins to blink, this may indicate a failure in the parking brake
system. Seek service from your dealer immediately.
P
25
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trailer Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS): Illuminates briefly when the
engine is powered-up and only when
a PLC trailer or a PLC diagnostic
tool is connected. If the light
remains on after the vehicle is started, continues to flash or fails to
illuminate, have the system serviced immediately.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS): If
the ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
Check transmission (Allison
CHECK
automatic transmission only):
TRANS
The lamp will illuminate for several
seconds after the ignition is turned
to the on position. Illumination of this light while driving indicates that a
problem has been detected and shifting may be restricted. Depending
upon the severity of the problem, the read-out digit on the shifter
display may be blank. Operation may continue in order to reach service
assistance. The ECU may not respond to shift selector requests, since
operating limitations are being placed on the transmission, i.e. upshifts
and downshifts may be restricted. Direction changes will not occur.
Refer to your transmission operator’s manual for more information.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt.
Range inhibit: Illuminates when
the transmission is not engaged in
the selected gear. The warning light
will go off when the gearshift lever
is adjusted in to the appropriate gear.
RANGE
INHIBIT
Refer to your transmission operator’s manual for more information.
26
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Diesel particulate filter:
Illuminates if the soot in the DPF
has reached a level where it
requires operator assistance. Refer
to Diesel Particulate Filter in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter and your engine operator’s manual, for more details.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Safety belt warning chime: Sounds when the key is in the ignition and
the driver’s safety belt is not fastened.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off, lock or accessory positions and the driver’s door is
opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (and the key is not in the ignition) and
the driver’s door is opened.
27
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Some of the gauges shown are optional based on vehicle equipment; your
vehicle may not have some of the gauges shown in this section.
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
28
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
To reset, press the control.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). If your vehicle
is equipped with dual fuel tanks, the
engine will draw fuel from the
driver-side fuel tank only. With dual
fuel tanks, the vehicle will be
equipped with a fuel transfer pump system that will draw fuel from the
passenger-side fuel tank and send fuel to the driver-side fuel tank. The
driver-side fuel tank must have fuel in it at all times otherwise the
vehicle may stall and may be difficult to re-start. The fuel gauge reads
the fuel level only from the driver-side fuel tank.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
H
the normal range (as indicated by
the arrows). If it enters the red
section, the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as
C
soon as safely possible, switch
off the engine and let the engine
cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot. The contents may be under pressure,
and could cause burns or other serious injury.
29
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range (as indicated by the arrows). If the needle falls below
the normal range, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and check the
engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your
vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the on position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
18
normal operating range (as
indicated by the arrows), have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
8
Transmission fluid temperature
gauge (if equipped, automatic
transmission only):
Indicates the temperature of the
transmission fluid. The normal
temperature range is 150°–230°F
(65°–110°C). Readings of
230°–250°F (110°–121°C) are
satisfactory for intermittent
operation and are not cause for
alarm. Operation above 250°F
(121°C) can cause the fluid to break down and will result in component
damage.
30
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Hourmeter (if equipped):
Registers the hours the engine has
been operating.
UltraShift gear display (if
equipped): Refer to the UltraShift
Driver Instructions Manual for the
function of this display.
Air filter restriction gauge:
Measures the vacuum inside the air
cleaner. The more the air cleaner is
restricted (dirty, clogged), the
higher the vacuum reading. Change
the air filter when the gauge reads
25 inches. After installation of the
new filter element, reset the gauge
to 0.
31
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Air pressure gauge: All vehicles
equipped with air brakes have a
60
90
dual-pointer air gauge to indicate
the pressure in each brake circuit.
PSI
The green pointer indicates the air
120
30
pressure in the primary system and
the red pointer indicates the air
pressure in the secondary system.
0 AIR 150
When the pressure is too low for
PRESSURE
normal brake operation (less than
60 psi [414 kPa]) and the ignition is
on:
• a warning buzzer will sound and
• a warning light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
WARNING: Do not drive the vehicle when the low air pressure
buzzer is sounding or the warning light is lit. These warnings
indicate there is not enough air pressure for the brake or suspension
system to operate properly.
Vehicles equipped with hydraulic brakes and an air compressor have a
single-pointer air gauge.
Note: This system does not have a low air pressure warning buzzer or a
low air pressure warning light.
32
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)
6
5
7
1
2
VOL
PUSH
ON
TONE
TONE VOL
ST
SEEK
DX
FM
12
TUNE
CLK
1
2
3
4
4
AM/FM
3
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
/
to find the
1. SEEK: Press
next strong station down/up the
frequency band.
/
to
2. TUNE: Press
manually change radio frequency
down/up.
33
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
4. Memory preset buttons: To set
a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
5. Power/Volume: Press to turn on
and off; turn to increase or decrease
volume levels.
6. TONE: Press TONE until the
desired level — Bass, Treble, Fade
appears on the display. Turn the
volume control to raise/lower the
levels, or to move the audio sound
from the right to left or the front to
back (if equipped).
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,
press and hold CLK until CLOCK
SET appears in the display. Press
or
SEEK to decrease
the hours.
increase
AM/FM
1
2
3
4
TONE
CLK
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the
or increase
the minutes.
display. Press TUNE to decrease
34
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Single CD/MP3 Radio
(if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
35
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll through all of the text in the current field
before changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within
3 seconds of the previous press to proceed to the next/last text display.
The last text field shown on the display will become the new display
message default.
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit.
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United
States.
3. AUX: This function is not
operational.
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media.
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
selections.
36
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access AUTOSET and Setting the
clock.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to switch between ON and OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local
radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations
for AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
) or decrease
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
(
) the hours/minutes.
Folder/Track mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to switch between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Repeats the current
CD/MP3 track when active (ON).
Press to show repeat status. Press
again to change status.
11. SHUFFLE: Plays CD/MP3
tracks in random order when active
(ON). Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to change status.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory.
: Press to access
13. FOLDER
the previous MP3 directory.
37
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United
States.
17. BAND: Press to switch between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
18. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band; tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
19. Power/volume: Press to turn on
and off; turn to increase or decrease
volume levels.
20. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
38
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21. COMP(Compression): Brings
soft and loud CD passages together
for a more consistent listening level
when in CD mode. Press COMP to turn the feature on and off.
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
or
to
23. CAT/Tune: Press
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band.
CAT (Category): CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite
Radio. Your radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United
States.
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD with the label side up.
39
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Premium Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Six CD/MP3
Radio (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
40
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll all of the text in the current field before
changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3 seconds of
the previous button press to proceed to the next/last text display.)
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit
only available in the continental United States.
3. AUX: Press to switch between
the current playing media and DVD
(if equipped).
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD. Press EJ
and a memory preset to eject a
specific disc. Press and hold to eject
all loaded discs.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
functions.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
41
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL
/
to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press to access the
following functions:
Compression: Brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU until
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SEL
control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to switch between ON andOFF. Allows you to set the strongest local
radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations
for AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
) or decrease
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
(
Folder/Track Mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to switch between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track. Press again
to disable.
11. SHUFFLE: Press play the
CD/MP3 tracks on the current disc
in random order. Press again to
disable.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory.
42
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
13. FOLDER
: Press to access
the previous MP3 directory
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
17. BAND: Press to switch between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
18. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency, tune to a
station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
19. Power/volume: Press to turn on
and off; turn to increase or decrease
volume levels.
20. Load: Press to load a CD. Press
LOAD and a memory preset to load
to a specific disc slot. Press and
hold to load up to six discs.
21. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
43
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
23. Disc/Tune: Press
or
to
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band, or to listen to the
previous/next CD.
CAT (Category): CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite
Radio. Your Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready
capability. The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your
dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer
installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the
continental United States.
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
There are three factors that can effect radio reception:
• Distance/Strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
44
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 inch
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
45
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe”
using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Set the temperature control to full heat.
46
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
3. Set the fan speed to its highest speed.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument
panel vents only.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
47
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
OFF or MAX A/C when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to its highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
48
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
High beams/Flash-to-pass
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the
high beams. Pull the lever towards
you to deactivate.
Pull toward you slightly to activate
flash-to-pass. Release to deactivate.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be turned to the on position and
• the headlamp control is in the
position.
position, parking lamp or autolamp
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
49
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Rotate the control to the full up
position, past the detent, to turn on
the interior lamps.
Rotate the control to the full down
position, past the detent, to prevent
the interior lights from illuminating when the doors are opened.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
If your vehicle is a tractor, the turn signals may not shut off when a turn
is completed; this is normal. Please see your dealer if there are any
questions on the options your vehicle has been equipped with.
50
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
control next to each lamp.
EXTERIOR LAMPS
Bulb inspection
It is a good safety practice to check operation of headlamps, parking
lamps, turn signals, clearance and marker lamps, instrument panel and
control lamps each day.
Using the right bulbs
Function
Number of
bulbs
2
2
2 (amber)
1 bulb each side
Trade number
2
5
1156
168
1
your dealer
105
Headlamps
Front turn signal lamps
Front sidemarker/Park lamps
Brake/Tail/Stop/Rear turn
signal/License lamps
Back-up lamps
Front clearance and identification
lamps
Dome lamp
To replace all instrument panel lights - see
H6054
1157
194
1157
51
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Bulb replacement
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the
position.
2. Remove the four screws and
move the parking lamp assembly
away from the headlamp bulb.
3. Remove the four screws and the
retaining bracket from the headlamp
bulb.
4. Pull the headlamp bulb out of the
housing, disconnect the electrical
connector and remove the headlamp
bulb.
5. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/side marker bulbs
To remove the parking lamp/turn signal bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the
signals are off.
52
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
position and the turn
Lights
2. Remove the four screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully lower the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb socket straight out
of the lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
5. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing front clearance and identification lamp bulbs
To change the cab marker bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the
position, then remove
the screw and lens from the lamp
assembly.
2. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
3. Install the lens on lamp assembly
with screw.
Replacing brake/tail/rear turn signal/back-up/license plate lamp bulbs
The brake/tail/turn
signal/back-up/license plate lamp
bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly.
Follow the same steps to replace
any of these bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp control
position and the turn
is in the
signals are off, then remove the four
screws and the lamp lens from lamp
assembly.
2. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new
bulb.
3. Install the lens on the lamp assembly with the four screws.
53
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper/washer controls
Rotate the windshield wiper control
to the desired interval, low or high
speed position.
The bars of varying length are for
intermittent wipers. When in this
position rotate the control upward
for fast intervals and downward for
slow intervals.
Press the control on the end of the
stalk to activate washer. Press and
hold for a longer wash cycle. The
washer will automatically shut off
after 10 seconds of continuous use.
TILT STEERING
Pull the tilt steering control toward
you to move the steering wheel up
or down. Hold the control while
adjusting the wheel to the desired
position, then release the control to
lock the steering wheel in position.
54
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The power point is an additional
power source for electrical
POWER POINT
accessories. The power points are
located on the instrument panel and
inside the center console storage
bin.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W/15A. If the power point or
cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information
on checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running (in a safe manner) to avoid unintentional discharge of the
battery. To prevent the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigarette/Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
55
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows.
• Press the top portion of the
rocker switch to close.
AUTO
• Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch to open.
AUTO
56
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
One touch down
• Press AUTO completely down and
release quickly. The driver’s
window will open fully. Press
again to stop window operation.
AUTO
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right side to restore the window controls.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
With the doors closed and the seat
adjusted for proper comfort, move
the mirrors to maximize rear
viewing area by adjusting the
western mirrors left or right as
required.
Adjust the auxiliary convex mirrors.
Convex mirrors are a ball-stud
design for precise adjustment to
maximize viewing area.
57
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror
or R to adjust the right mirror.
MIRRORS
L
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
R
MIRRORS
L
R
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
4. If your vehicle’s mirrors are equipped with spotter mirrors (located
below the main mirrors), they must be adjusted manually.
Heated mirrors (if equipped)
Both main mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog
and are automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
Note: The mirrors may be hot to the touch but will not burn. This is a
normal condition.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
58
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The mirror heating elements are designed to operate regardless of the
geographic location of the vehicle. There is no switch to turn on, or
other operator involvement required other than to start the vehicle.
The spotter mirror (if equipped) is not heated.
Foldaway mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded
forward or backwards for narrow
spaces like driving through an
automatic car wash or backing out
of a garage with the trailer tow
mirror.
The telescoping feature (if
equipped) allows the mirror to
extend approximately three inches
(76 mm). This feature is especially
useful to the driver when towing a
trailer.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
To turn speed control on
Press CRUISE RPM. If the vehicle is
moving, speed control will be
enabled; if the vehicle is stationary,
engine RPM can be controlled.
CRUISE
RPM
OFF
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed
control on.
59
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To turn speed control off
Press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Once speed control is switched off,
the previously programmed engine
RPM will be erased.
CRUISE
RPM
OFF
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
To set a speed
Press SET –. If the vehicle is
moving, this will set the vehicle
speed. If the vehicle is stationary,
this will set the vehicle idle RPM.
RESUME
SET
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary
momentarily slower or faster than the set speed; this is normal.
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the
set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set
speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next
lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed.
If the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h) or engine RPM falls
below 1,000 RPM, your speed control will disengage; this is normal.
Pressing RESUME + will re-engage it.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
60
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To set a higher set speed
Press and hold RESUME +. If the
vehicle is moving, this will increase
RESUME
vehicle speed; if the vehicle is
stationary, this will increase engine
RPM. Release the control when the
SET
desired vehicle speed/engine RPM is
reached.
Press and release RESUME + to
operate the tap-up function. Each press will increase the set speed by
1 mph (1.6 km/h) or engine RPM in idle mode.
To set a lower set speed
Press and hold SET –. If the vehicle
is moving, this will decrease vehicle
RESUME
speed; if the vehicle is stationary,
this will decrease engine RPM.
Release the control when the
SET
desired vehicle speed/engine RPM is
reached.
Press and release SET – to operate
the tap-down function. Each press will decrease the set speed in
increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or engine RPM in idle mode.
To disengage speed control
Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed
set speed or engine RPM.
• Press the brake pedal or
61
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Press the clutch pedal (if
equipped).
Pressing OFF will erase the
previously programmed engine RPM.
CRUISE
RPM
OFF
To return to a previously set speed
Press RESUME +. For RESUME +
to operate, the vehicle speed must
be above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
engine speed must be above 1,000
RPM.
62
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
RESUME
SET
Driver Controls
GAUGE PACKAGE
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional gauge package. It will
have one of the following configurations:
UltraShift gauge package: This
will contain the following two
gauges:
1. UltraShift gauge: for the operation
of this gauge refer to the UltraShift
Driver Instructions Manual.
2. Hourmeter: displays the hours of
engine run time.
Overhead gauge package: This
will contain the following two
gauges:
1. Transmission temperature gauge:
displays the transmission
temperature at the transmission
sump. (Refer to the Gauges section
for additional description.)
2. Hourmeter: displays the hours of
engine run time.
63
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press U to unlock all doors and L to
lock all doors.
L
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the
childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.
64
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
U
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure the seat is re-latched into
place.
• Lift the handle to on the side of
the seat to adjust the angle of the
seatback.
65
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
70% – two person passenger bench seat (if equipped)
Lift the handle on the seatback to
tilt the seatback forward.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
66
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
Press the control to turn the heated
seats on and off.
67
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Air-Ride seat (if equipped)
1. Chugger option: Dampens road vibrations and allows the seat to
move with the driver when unlocked.
To unlock, sit in the seat and slide the tab away from the seat (to the
right)
To lock, sit in the seat and slide the tab toward the seat (to the left).
2. Seat adjuster: Lift up to move the seat forward or backward. Release
the bar to lock the seat in position.
3. Seat height adjuster: Pull the control up to raise the seat, push it
down to lower the seat.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of excess slack in the belt
system, always adjust the seat height before fastening the seat
belt.
4. Power lumbar: Press the top of the forward control to inflate the
lower lumbar support; press the bottom of the forward control to deflate
the lower lumbar support.
Press the top of the rear control to inflate the upper lumbar support;
press the bottom of the rear control to deflate the upper lumbar support.
5. Recline: Lift the handle to adjust the angle of the seatback.
68
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
REAR FLIP-UP SEAT (IF EQUIPPED)
Flipping up the seat
The rear seatback has a split 60/40
seat. Each seat cushion can be
flipped-up into the seatback
position.
1. Pull the control to release the
seat cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it
locks into the vertical storage
position.
Returning the seat to horizontal position
WARNING: Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNING: Make sure the safety belts are accessible and not
trapped behind the seat when the seat is returned to its
horizontal position.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat to release the seat cushion
from its storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it locks into the horizontal position.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
69
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
70
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front and rear seat passenger
outboard safety belts have vehicle sensitive emergency locking retractors.
Lap belts
The front center and rear center lap belts do not adjust automatically.
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
71
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive retractor allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locks in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Front safety belt height adjustment
SuperCab and Crew Cab vehicles have safety belt height adjustments for
the driver and front outboard passenger. Adjust the height of the
shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
• SuperCab
72
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Crew Cab
To lower the shoulder belt height, press the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height
adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
73
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an eight inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a collision.
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety
belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be
inspected for proper function and replaced, if necessary. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in
severe personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
74
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
75
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Seat belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
76
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an air bag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal air
bags are not designed to inflate in
rear and side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag
system
One-time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, Belt-Minder威 will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
Deactivating/Activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
Read Steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The Belt-Minder威 feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (if equipped) or N (Neutral) (automatic
transmissions) or the neutral position (manual transmission).
• The ignition switch is in the off position.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled.
• The headlamp control is in the
position.
77
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
Belt-Minder威 activation and deactivation procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. (DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately
1–2 minutes.)
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during Belt-Minder威
warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled.
• After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable Belt-Minder威 if it is currently enabled, or enable
Belt-Minder威 if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling Belt-Minder威 is provided by the safety belt
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling Belt-Minder威 is provided by:
• The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three
seconds.
• Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off.
• Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
78
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat
is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety
toddlers (generally age four or younger)
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
79
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a
children longer properly fit in a child safety seat belt-positioning
(generally children who are less than
booster seat.
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lbs
(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg) and upward
to 100 lbs (45 kg) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
children longer properly fit in a belt-positioning safety belt having
booster seat (generally children who are the lap belt snug
and low across
at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
the hips, shoulder
tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child belt centered
across the
restraint manufacturer)
shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
80
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Restraint Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Type
Weight and top only)
top
(lower
tether
tether anchors
anchor)
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
Rear
Up to
facing
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward
Up to
facing
48 lb
X
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward
Over
facing
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If
all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
81
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
82
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether
anchor. For more information on top tether straps and anchors, refer to
Attaching safety seats with tether straps.
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child
may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
83
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
WARNING: Children under 12 are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat, to the extent this is possible.
2. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
84
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Buckle the seat belt. Push down
on the child seat and pull on the
shoulder portion of the belt to snug
the lap belt. Hold the lap and
shoulder belts next to the tongue
and unbuckle the belt.
4. Install a locking clip over both lap
and shoulder belt portions next to
the sliding tongue. Rebuckle the
belt. Obtain the locking clip kit (part
number FO3Z-5461248–A) at no
charge from an authorized dealer. A
locking clip may also have been
provided with your child safety seat.
5. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab
the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward
and back. There should be no more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
6. If the child seat is not tight enough, unbuckle the seat belt, move the
tongue and locking clip to shorten the lap portion and push down hard
on the child seat while you rebuckle the belt.
7. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each
use.
8. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
85
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats in the lap belt seating positions
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap
belt webbing to remove slack from and tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat
from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be
no more than one inch of movement for proper installation.
7. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
Attaching safety seats with tether straps
Most forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes
over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. The
F-650/750 vehicles are not equipped with an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering
a tether strap.
Tether anchorage hardware
A tethered seat can be installed in the front seat. Put the tether strap
over the seatback and attach it to an anchor bracket.
An anchor bracket can be installed to the inside of the back panel of
your vehicle.
The anchor bracket must be installed using the instructions provided
with the tether anchorage hardware kit.
Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D74) including
instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
86
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If you have a SuperCab or Crew Cab, Ford recommends you attach
tether safety seats in the rear seating position (if possible) with the
tether strap attached to the tether anchorage bracket as shown in the
instructions provided with the tether anchor kit.
WARNING: Tighten the anchor according to specifications.
Otherwise, the safety seat may not be properly secured and the
child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
87
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
88
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
89
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
90
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
4
accessories such as the radio to
3
operate while the engine is not
5
running.
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,
2
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
1
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all
accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Starting the engine
WARNING: Operation of a diesel engine near flammable vapors
in the air may cause the engine speed to increase uncontrollably
and over speed. If this situation occurs, mechanical damage, fire,
explosion, personal injury or death could result. Turning off the
ignition key will not slow or stop the engine due to uncontrollable
fueling of the engine through flammable vapors being drawn into
the engine air inlet. Operation of components such as starter,
alternator, electric motors, etc. and static electricity could also ignite
flammable vapors.
Do not operate the truck in the possible presence of flammable vapors
unless both a complete hazard analysis is performed and necessary
additional safety processes and/or equipment such as vapor testing, air
intake shutoff devices, ventilation, etc. are utilized. The operator is
responsible for using those processes and/or equipment to ensure that
the diesel engine and all other components on the truck can be
operated safely under the specific conditions and hazards that may be
encountered.
Note: If equipped with Eaton UltraShift transmission, allow UltraShift to
power up before starting the engine. Engine cranking is delayed until the
transmission power up is complete and the gear display shows a solid N.
91
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: When starting the engine, do not press the accelerator as engine
damage may result.
1. Ensure headlamps and all accessories are turned off, the parking
brake is applied and the transmission is in the neutral position (or P
[Park] for Allison 2200 transmissions).
2. Turn the key to the on position, but do not start the engine.
In cooler weather, the air intake
WAIT
heater may activate the WAIT TO
TO
START light in the instrument
START
cluster. If the WAIT TO START light
illuminates, do not crank the engine
until the light goes off.
WARNING: If equipped with an air intake heater, DO NOT use
ether or any other starting fluids. The use of starting fluids
(ether) in an engine equipped with an air intake heater could cause an
explosion and result in property damage and/or personal injury.
3. When the WAIT TO START light turns off, turn the key to the start
position; when the engine starts, release the key.
If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking, allow two
minutes for the starter to cool before trying again. Excessive cranking
may damage the starter.
After the engine starts:
• On some engines, the WAIT TO
WAIT
START light should illuminate
TO
after the engine starts. Allow the
START
engine to idle about three
minutes or until the engine
coolant temperature gauge begins to rise. Maintain idle speed until the
WAIT TO START light cycles off to indicate the air intake heater has
shut off (approximately six minutes). Operating the engine at higher
speeds will reduce the effectiveness of the air inlet heater.
92
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Do not increase engine speed
until the oil pressure gauge
indicates normal pressure (as
indicated by the arrows); this
should be indicated on the gauge
within 15 seconds after starting.
• Idle the engine for three to five
minutes before operating with a
full load.
• Try to limit engine idle to
10 minutes. Excessive idling reduces fuel economy.
• When starting a cold engine, increase the engine speed (RPM) slowly
to make sure adequate lubrication is available to the bearings.
Cold weather operation
WARNING: Do not use volatile starting aids such as ether,
propane or gasoline in the engine air intake system. Glow plugs
may ignite vapors which can cause engine damage or personal injury.
In order to operate the engine in temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower,
read the following instructions:
• Make sure that the batteries are of sufficient size and are fully
charged. Check other electrical components to make sure they’re in
optimum condition.
• Use a permanent-type engine coolant solution to protect the engine
against damage from freezing.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a water-fuel separator, drain it daily.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of daily operation to prevent condensation
in the fuel system.
• Make sure you use proper cold weather engine oil and that it is at its
proper level.
• At temperatures of –4°F (–20°C) or below, it is recommended that you
use a crankcase-mounted coolant heater to improve cold engine
starting.
• If operating in arctic temperatures of –20°F (–29°C) or lower, consult
your truck dealer for information about special cold weather
equipment and precautions.
93
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: Idling in cold weather will not heat the engine to its normal
operating temperature. Long periods of idling in cold weather can cause
a build-up of heavy deposits of carbon and rust on valve stems causing
them to stick which, in turn, can cause valvetrain damage.
Winter fronts
The use of winter fronts, or other air-restrictive devices mounted in front
of the radiator on vehicles with chassis-mounted charge air coolers, are
not recommended unless extremely cold weather conditions exist. Air
flow restriction can cause high exhaust temperatures, power loss,
excessive fan usage and a reduction in fuel economy. If you must use a
winter front, the device should have a permanent opening of at least 120
sq in. (774 sq. cm) directly in line with the fan hub.
Hot weather operation
• Keep the engine cooling system filled with a clean, permanent coolant
solution to protect against damage from overheating.
• Fill the fuel tank at the end of daily operation to prevent condensation
in the fuel system.
• Keep external surfaces of the engine, radiator, charge air cooler, A/C
condenser and accessories clean to avoid dirt build-up.
Above normal coolant temperatures could be experienced while driving
in a transmission gear ratio which lugs the engine. To correct this
problem, engine speed should be increased by downshifting in to the
next lower gear to increase engine RPM.
Starting a turbocharged engine with the vehicle on a steep grade
When starting a diesel engine when the loaded vehicle is on a grade, the
engine RPM will start to fall slightly when the clutch is engaged; do not
disengage the clutch and try to increase engine RPM as this may damage
driveline components. The engine will recover as the vehicle begins
moving.
Engine shutdown
Allow the engine to idle for three to five minutes before shutting it
down. The larger the engine, the greater the need for this idling period.
However, do not let the engine idle for more than 10 minutes.
Restarting after running out of fuel
The fuel system may need to be purged of air, refer to Running out of
fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
94
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
• Avoid extended (more than 10 minutes) and unnecessary idling.
• Start the vehicle in motion by using the highest gear speed in the
transmission that will let the engine easily start the load without
slipping the clutch.
• Accelerate smoothly and evenly; rapid acceleration increases fuel
consumption without increasing engine performance.
• When approaching a hill, press the accelerator smoothly to start the
incline at full power, then shift down as needed to maintain vehicle
speed.
• When going down a hill, or long steep grades, prevent over-speeding
of the engine. The engine governor has no control over engine speed
when it is being pushed by a loaded vehicle.
• Always shift to a lower gear at high altitudes to prevent engine
smoking.
• Operate in a gear that will permit an engine speed not in excess of the
maximum governed speed or high-idle RPM (no load).
• Normally, choose the same gear to descend the hill that you would use
to ascend the hill.
WARNING: All vehicles have blind spots. To reduce the risk of
severe injury or property damage, never move your vehicle to
the side or rear or change lanes without being sure your way is clear
on both sides and to your rear.
Backing up
WARNING: To reduce the risk of the possibility of personal
injury while backing the vehicle, always be sure your vehicle’s
path is clear.
Before backing your vehicle, be sure you can do so safely. If anything
behind the cab limits your view, do not rely on mirrors alone to ensure
that your intended path is clear. If other people are in the vicinity, have
someone standing well behind your vehicle and outside of your intended
path (visible through an exterior mirror) guide you as you back up.
95
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Although OSHA or some governmental regulations may require the use
of an electrical or mechanical back-up alarm to warn bystanders, such an
alarm does not ensure that the intended path is clear. When in doubt,
get out of the vehicle and visually check the intended path is clear;
back-up slowly as to allow others time to move, if necessary.
If an electrical back-up alarm is installed, it should be connected to the
back-up lamp circuit.
Parking your vehicle
Always use the parking brake. When parking on a grade, block the wheels
and turn the front wheels to one side so that if the vehicle rolls, the front
tires will act against the curb to stop the vehicle. The front wheels will be
more effective at stopping a rolling vehicle than the rear wheels.
WARNING: When parking your vehicle, do not leave the
transmission in gear; if the key is in the on position and the
vehicle rolls, the engine could start. Failure to follow these instructions
could result in an unattended vehicle moving, possibly causing personal
injury or property damage.
Driving through water
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the hubs. Traction or brake capability
may be limited and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine, drive axles or the
transmission (through the breather ports).
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle
slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do
not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Engine Idle Shutdown system.
This system will automatically shut down your engine when it has been
idling in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake set) or
15 minutes (parking brake not set). During the engine idle shutdown
process:
• The Service Engine Soon light will flash, once per second, for the
final 30 seconds just prior to shutdown.
96
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Within the final 30 seconds, the timer can be reset by:
1. changing the position of the accelerator pedal, or
2. changing the brake pedal, clutch pedal, or park brake from engaged
to disengaged or from disengaged to engaged.
• When the timer reaches zero, the engine will shut down.
• In this event, the key remains in the on position, and power
continues to be supplied to the accessories.
Battery power may be drained if the key is left in the on position
without the engine running.
Note: The engine idle shutdown timer will not start if:
• The engine is operating in power take-off (PTO) mode.
• The engine coolant temperature is below 60°F (16°C).
• The exhaust emission control system is regenerating the diesel
particulate filter (DPF).
ENGINE AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN WARNING LIGHT OR CHIME
(IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic shutdown feature that
stops the engine in the event of high coolant temperature, low engine oil
pressure, high diesel particulate filter soot loading or low engine coolant
level. A warning light in the instrument cluster and a warning chime will
indicate high engine coolant temperature, low engine oil pressure or the
need to have the diesel particulate filter cleaned or serviced. If the
engine coolant temperature becomes too high, engine oil pressure too
low or the diesel particulate filter too restricted, the engine will
automatically shut down.
If the engine shuts down, it can be restarted and operated for
30 seconds at a time or until the problem is corrected. Do not attempt to
use this restarting feature to drive the vehicle very far as serious engine
damage could result.
WARNING: In the event of engine shutdown, make sure the
vehicle is safely off the road and the problem is remedied prior
to returning to the road. Failure to remove the vehicle from the road
could result in an accident, causing serious injury or death.
97
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
GENERAL BRAKE INFORMATION
All standard equipment brakes are designed to be self-adjusting.
Automatic adjustment, when required, occurs whenever the brakes are
applied and released during forward or reverse operation. Refer to the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
Know the required stopping distances for all driving conditions that may
be encountered. For longer brake lining life, take full advantage of engine
braking power when coming to a stop.
WARNING: Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal. This will result in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear and increased stopping distances.
Before descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid
continuous application of the brakes. Normally, choose the same gear to
descend the hill that you would use to ascend the hill.
WARNING: Continuous application of the brakes will cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in a temporary loss of braking.
If brakes do not grip well
• If you have been driving through deep water, gently apply the brakes
several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
• Let the brakes cool if you have been using them excessively, as in
mountain driving or after several fast, high speed stops.
• Check brake adjustment.
• Check brake linings for excessive wear.
• Check system air pressure. (Air brakes only)
98
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
HYDRAULIC BRAKES (IF EQUIPPED)
Full power brake system
The Full Power Brake System incorporates standard braking, Anti-lock
Braking (ABS), and optional Power Park Brake into one fully integrated
hydraulic brake system. With the Full Power Brake System, braking
energy is stored, similar to an air brake system, resulting in faster
response times and shorter stopping distances. This is accomplished
using motor/pump assemblies that pressurized the system by pumping
brake fluid into accumulators. This is similar to the air compressor of an
air brake system pressurizing the air tanks. The system includes a master
cylinder that provides the normal pedal “feel” and transfers the pedal
force, via brake fluid, to the main components of the Full Power Brake
System.
NOTE: The motor/pumps will run momentarily with the ignition switch
in the on or run positions or the switch is in the off position and the
brake pedal is pressed.
WARNING: If the red BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster remains illuminated after engine start up, this indicates a
system failure in the Full Power Brake System. Stop the vehicle safely
as soon as possible and seek service immediately.
NOTE: During normal driving the pump/motors may be heard
replenishing the accumulators. This is a normal function of the Full
Power Brake System.
99
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, pull handle up until it
snaps into the locked position.
WARNING: Do not use the
gearshift selector in place of
the parking brake. Always set the
parking brake fully AND make
sure the gearshift selector is in R
(Reverse) for vehicles equipped
with manual transmission, P
(Park) (if equipped) or N
(Neutral) for vehicles with
automatic transmission. Use of
wheel chocks is also
recommended in hilly or off-road
usage.
WARNING: Unexpected
and possible sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
When the parking brake is out of adjustment, seek service immediately.
The parking BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
in the instrument cluster illuminates
and will remain illuminated (when
the ignition is turned on) until the
parking brake is released.
P
100
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Push the palm release lever on the
parking brake handle and push
down as far as possible to release
the brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to
wear out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
WARNING: If the parking
brake is fully released but
the parking brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. See
your dealer or a qualified service
technician.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake only applies
retardation to the rear wheels, the vehicle’s stopping distance will
increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely
affected.
POWER PARK (PARKING BRAKE) OPTION (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature uses a brake chamber mounted on the chassis to power a
spring-applied, air-released driveline parking brake. It is controlled by a
yellow, dash-mounted parking brake knob.
The Power Park Brake is controlled by the park brake dash-mounted,
yellow knob-type switch. The switch has three positions: apply (out),
neutral (central), and release (in). The switch is spring-loaded to return
to the neutral (central) position after being pushed or pulled.
There is no visual indication at the knob that the park brake is applied or
released. Always observe the gauge cluster Park Brake indicator to
determine if the park brake is applied or released.
101
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Applying the parking brake
To apply the parking brake, pull the yellow, dash-mounted parking brake
knob. A red light on the dash panel should illuminate indicating that the
parking brake has been successfully set.
Note: If the park brake indicator light blinks and a warning chime
sounds when the control knob is pulled, the parking brake is not
functioning properly; seek immediate service from your dealer. Refer to
Parking Brake Warning System in this section.
Releasing the parking brake
Note: Read and understand the following steps and perform them
whenever you prepare to drive the vehicle.
Note: The parking brake will not disengage unless sufficient system air
pressure is available.
For vehicles with automatic transmissions - dash-mounted push
button (Allison 3000 Series) and steering column-mounted
(Allison 2200 and 2500) gear selection:
1. With the engine running, press and hold the service brake pedal.
2. Select the appropriate drive gear.
3. Push and hold the yellow, dash-mounted parking brake knob until the
Park Brake indicator goes out, then release.
For vehicles with manual transmissions (TTC 7–speed, Eaton/Fuller 5–speed and 6–speed):
1. With the engine running, press and hold the service brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the clutch pedal.
3. Select the appropriate drive gear.
4. Push and hold the yellow, dash-mounted parking brake knob until the
Park Brake indicator goes out, then release.
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while moving the
gearshift lever from position to position. If the brake pedal is not
held down, the vehicle may move unexpectedly resulting in property
damage, personal injury or death.
102
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake light illumination due to low air pressure
If at any time during vehicle operation air pressure is too low, the
parking brake may apply and the parking brake light will turn on.
If the parking brake is applied due to low air pressure, immediate service
is required to the parking brake system.
Parking brake warning system
If the parking brake warning light blinks and a chime sounds when
pulling the yellow control knob out, this indicates the parking brake is
not functioning properly; seek service for the parking brake immediately.
The light will blink and the chime will sound until the yellow control
knob is pushed in or approximately eight minutes have passed. If the
yellow control knob is pulled out again, the light will blink and the chime
will sound as a reminder that immediate service is required to the
parking brake system.
Releasing spring manually
WARNING: Do not attempt to disassemble the parking brake
chamber under any circumstances. The high spring load may
cause serious injury.
If hydraulic pressure is released from the spring brake chamber the
power spring applies the brake and, unless hydraulic pressure can be
re-established, the spring brake must be released as follows in order to
move the vehicle.
WARNING: Block the wheels to help prevent the vehicle from
moving.
WARNING: Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions are not taken.
103
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Loosen the jam nut (1) and un-thread the adjustment rod (2) from the
chamber to reduce tension on the cable (3). Continue to un-thread the
adjustment rod all the way and remove it from the chamber. The nut and
shaft are metric.
AIR BRAKES (IF EQUIPPED)
General air brake information
After starting the engine, give the air compressor time to build up the air
pressure to 60 psi (414 kPa) before moving the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not drive or continue to drive if the low air
pressure buzzer is sounding or the brake warning light is lit.
These warnings indicate that air pressure is not to normal operating
level. Continued use of the vehicle could result in loss of braking
ability.
WARNING: Avoid repeated light application of the brake pedal.
This will deplete air pressure faster and could result in loss of
braking capability.
104
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Periodically check the air pressure
gauge while driving. Pressure should
range between approximately
100–125 psi (690–862 kPa). The air
compressor governor cut-in and
cut-out pressure settings are preset
at the factory and are not
adjustable.
When air pressure is insufficient
(below 60 psi [414 kPa]), a warning
light illuminates and a buzzer
sounds when the ignition is in the
on position.
This condition may be caused by excessive brake applications depleting
the system air pressure. If this condition occurs, stop driving the vehicle
until the compressor has fully recharged the air system.
WARNING: Do not move the vehicle when the air pressure is
insufficient because the brake system may be inoperative.
Select a gear ratio to help slow your vehicle before descending grades.
Supplement with brakes as required to safely slow the vehicle and avoid
overspeeding the engine.
Air chamber stroke indication
Air chamber push rods have orange stroke indicator markers that warn
when the braking system requires adjustment or repair. The orange
stripe is painted on the air chamber push rod at the slack adjuster stroke
dimension which requires service when visible during brake application.
Air brake inspection and adjustment or repairs should be performed by a
qualified service technician in accordance with the instructions in the
service manual.
105
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Cam brakes - automatic slack adjusters
Standard air brakes (cam) are
equipped with automatic brake
adjusters. Automatic adjustment
occurs during brake applications.
Inspect brakes for proper
adjustment at the intervals listed in
the Scheduled Maintenance Guide
chapter.
WARNING: Do not
manually adjust the
automatic slack adjusters to
correct excessive push rod stroke
as it may result in reduced brake
effectiveness and a vehicle crash.
Excessive pushrod stroke
indicates that a problem exists
with the automatic adjuster, with
the installation of the adjuster, or
with foundation brake components
that manual adjustment will not
remedy. Seek service from a
qualified facility for excessive
push rod stroke.
Emergency air brake
All vehicles are equipped with a dual brake system. In the unlikely event
of a failure of one system, the second system will function for emergency
stopping. These systems are all controlled by the brake pedal in the
same manner as for normal stops.
WARNING: Do not continue to operate the vehicle with a
failure of one of the brake systems. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service immediately.
106
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Air brake reservoir draining
WARNING: Failure to drain air brake reservoirs can result in a
reduction or loss of braking ability due to fluid accumulation in
the reservoir and/or possible freeze-up during cold weather.
Drain all the air brake reservoirs
daily, completely to 0 psi/kPa, by
opening the draincock at the ends
of the tanks (where accessible.
Pull-chains are used when the
drains are undercab or otherwise
inaccessible). Close draincock after
complete draining. Air tanks
equipped with automatic moisture
ejector valves may also be drained
manually as required to maintain a
dry air system. Contact your dealer if you are unsure of the air reservoir
locations or the draining procedure.
Parking brake
WARNING: Do not use the gearshift selector in place of the
parking brake; unexpected and possible sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. Always set
the parking brake fully AND make sure the gearshift selector is in R
(Reverse) for vehicles equipped with manual transmission, N (Neutral)
for vehicles with automatic transmission (except Allison 2200
transmission) or P (Park) (Allison 2200 transmission).
If the service brakes should fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion,
you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. Since the
parking brake only applies stopping power to the rear wheels, the
vehicle’s stopping distance will greatly increase and the handling of the
vehicle will be adversely affected. Repairs should be made immediately
to an inoperative air brake system circuit.
107
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake control (knob)
Pull the yellow parking brake knob
out to apply the parking brake. Push
the knob in to release the parking
brake.
WARNING: This control is
used for parking only. Do
not leave the vehicle unattended
after setting the parking brake
without placing the transmission
in R (Reverse) for manual
transmission, N (Neutral) for
automatic transmission (except
Allison 2200 transmission) or P
(Park) (Allison 2200
transmission). Use of wheel
chocks is also recommended in
hilly or off-road usage.
The parking BRAKE warning light in
the instrument cluster illuminates
and remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned to the on position)
until the parking brake is released.
BRAKE
P
Releasing spring brake with air pressure
The air system in all vehicles with spring-actuated rear wheel parking
brakes is equipped with a tank valve located on the supply or service air
tank for connection to an outside air supply. The valve permits the
system to be recharged with air from an outside source, releasing the
spring-actuated parking brakes. The vehicle may then be towed in an
emergency.
An outside air source can be used only if the protected system is in
operating condition. If air pressure cannot be restored in the protected
air system, the spring-actuated brakes must be released manually.
108
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Releasing spring brake manually
WARNING: Do not attempt to disassemble the parking brake
chamber under any circumstances. The high spring load may
cause serious injury if the chamber clamps are removed.
If air pressure is released from the spring brake chamber the power
spring applies the brake and, unless air pressure can be re-established,
the spring brake must be released as follows in order to move the
vehicle.
WARNING: Block the wheels to help prevent the vehicle from
moving.
WARNING: Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions are not taken.
Impact wrenches should not be used as they may damage the piston and
prevent proper caging of the spring. Do not apply more than 50 lb. ft.
(68 N•m) torque to the release bolt nut.
1. Remove the stud tool and nut
from the carrying pocket on the
brake chamber assembly.
2. Remove the access plug from the
end of the spring chamber.
3. Insert the release stud through
the opening in the chamber and into
the spring pressure plate.
109
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
4. Turn the release stud one-quarter
turn to engage the stud tangs with
the slot in the pressure plate. Keep
the stud engaged and install the nut
on the release stud.
5. Tighten the nut until the spring is
fully caged and the brakes are
released. Do not loosen or remove
the release stud and nut unless the brake chamber is completely
assembled and is securely clamped.
6. When the air pressure is restored, unscrew and remove the release
stud and install in the carrying pocket. Install the access plug.
EXHAUST BRAKE (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The exhaust brake is
intended to help control vehicle
speed; it is not a vehicle stopping
device.
An exhaust brake is an optional
auxiliary braking system that assists,
but does not replace, the primary
service brake system. An on-off
switch on the instrument panel, in
combination with the accelerator
and clutch pedal switches, allows the operator to make maximum use of
the exhaust brake in the following conditions:
• off-highway driving
• mountain driving
• heavy traffic
• high speed highway driving
110
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Operation
Push the rocker switch up to turn
the exhaust brake on. The switch
will illuminate in the on position.
Push the switch down to turn the
brake off.
Starting engine
Before starting the engine, make sure that the exhaust brake switch is in
the OFF position. Do not turn the exhaust brake on until the engine has
reached normal operating temperatures.
Driving downhill
While approaching a steep grade, make sure that the exhaust brake
switch is in the on position. The exhaust brake actuates as soon as you
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. While going down the
grade, use a low enough gear to descend safely with a minimum
application of the service brakes. As a general guideline, use the same
gear as you would to ascend the hill.
Before descending a hill or steep grade always select the proper gear. If
the transmission is taken out of gear while descending it is possible that
you will not be able to select another gear because of maximum RPM
being governed.
Note: Maximum exhaust brake performance is related to the type of
transmission your vehicle is equipped with.
Note: Manual transmissions should be downshifted to the lowest gear
possible, without exceeding the maximum RPM limit of the engine. This
will maximize the exhaust brake’s retarding effect.
Note: Exhaust brakes will operate effectively with automatic
transmission, but performance will vary with engine speed and the gear
selected by the transmission.
Make sure the engine speed does not exceed the maximum allowable
engine RPM. Exceeding the maximum allowable engine RPM will result
in damage to the engine. Apply the service brakes to reduce the engine
RPM or make a slower descent by using a lower gear.
111
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: Engine speed has a major influence of retarding performance.
When engine speed is maintained at the maximum allowable level, the
exhaust brake will operate at peak performance.
WARNING: The exhaust brake is not recommended for use on
slippery or low traction road surfaces. Under these conditions a
loss of vehicle control could occur.
Exhaust brake operating characteristics
When you remove your feet from both the accelerator and clutch pedals
and the exhaust brake switch is in the on position, the exhaust brake is
activated. The following conditions should exist if the brake is operating
properly:
• A slight change in the sound of the engine when the exhaust brake is
activated.
• Engine temperature remains in the normal operating range.
• Road speed usually decreases when the exhaust brake is applied
during a descent, except when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or
the grade is extremely steep. In these instances, you may need to
apply the service brakes occasionally.
• During a descent, the tachometer usually shows a drop in RPM
depending on the grade and the vehicle load.
• Do not expect a retarding effect similar to sudden hard application of
the service brakes. The exhaust brake retards the vehicle with a
smooth braking effect.
• Depending on the grade and vehicle load, you may or may not feel the
retarding force acting against your body when the brake is applied.
The brake’s retarding force is actually preventing the vehicle from
going much faster.
• Engine speed has a major effect on retarding performance, with higher
engine speeds permitting greater retarding ability.
• Engine brake performance is closely related to the type of
transmission your vehicle is equipped with. Downshifting of manual
transmission to the lowest gear possible, without exceeding the
maximum engine RPM limit, will maximize retarding performance.
Exhaust brakes will operate effectively with automatic transmissions,
but performance will vary with engine speed and the gear selected by
the transmission.
112
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Make sure the exhaust brake is turned off before shutting off the engine.
Note: Installing an exhaust or auxiliary brake does not necessarily
protect the engine from exceeding maximum governed speed. The
primary brakes should be used to make sure the engine never exceeds
maximum governed speed under any conditions.
TRAILER BRAKE HAND CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The hand control, located on the
right-hand side of the instrument
panel, is used to apply the trailer
service brakes which are
independent of the truck or tractor
service brakes.
WARNING: The hand
control should never be
used to apply the brakes when the
tractor and trailer are parked
unattended. Air may leak from the
system and the vehicle could
possibly move, resulting in
possible property damage,
personal injury or death.
The hand control operates a valve that provides gradual control of air
pressure applied; when the valve is only partially applied, the trailer
brakes can be overridden by pressing fully on the brake pedal.
To apply the trailer brakes using the hand control, move the lever
downward. The further the lever is pushed downward, the greater the air
pressure is applied to the brakes. The lever will remain in place until
manually moved.
To release the trailer brakes, move the lever upward completely.
113
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY AND PARKING BRAKE MODULAR
CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
LL
PU
TO
EV
AC
UA
TE
TRAILER
AIR SUPPLY
SH
TO
SU
PP
LY
NOT FOR PARKING
PU
The trailer air supply valve delivers air to the trailer supply and will
automatically pop out, shutting off the trailer supply, if pressure is
decreased to approximately 35 psi (249 kPa).
The parking brake controls the spring brakes on the tractor. When the
knob is pulled out it causes the trailer supply valve to pop out, applying
both the tractor and trailer parking brakes. The trailer brakes may be
independently released by pushing only the trailer air supply valve in.
2
1
1
2
Initial charge
With the air system completely discharged, both knobs (1 and 2) will be
out. When the air pressure reaches 70 psi (483 kPa) the trailer air
supply (1 – red knob) may be pushed in and should stay in charging the
trailer air system and releasing the trailer brakes.
114
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1
2
Driving
The parking brake (2–yellow knob) can now be pushed in and supply air
to the tractor spring brakes, releasing them.
1
2
Normal driving position
With both knobs pushed in, air is then supplied to both trailer and
tractor spring brakes, and all brakes are released.
115
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
2
1
1
1
2
2
System park
With both knobs pushed in (normal driving position), the parking brakes
for both the tractor and trailer can be applied by pulling the parking
brake knob (2) out, exhausting air from the tractor spring brakes,
simultaneously causing the trailer air supply valve to pop out, applying
the trailer brakes.
2
1
1
2
Trailer charge
If both knobs are out, and you want to recharge the trailer while leaving
the tractor spring brakes applied, the trailer air supply (1) can be
pushed in to recharge the trailer air supply line. This mode may also be
used to park a combination vehicle with tractor spring brakes.
116
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
1
2
Automatic application
If both knobs are pushed in and the brake system air pressure is reduced
to approximately 35 psi (249 kPa), the trailer air supply (1) knob will
automatically pop out applying the emergency or parking brakes on the
trailer. If the trailer air supply (1) knob is manually held in and the air
pressure is reduced to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), a tripper piston
within the valve will move, exhausting the trailer air supply, applying the
trailer brakes. Further reduction of air pressure, while holding the trailer
air supply knob in, will cause the parking brake knob to pop out at 25 psi
(172 kPa).
1
2
Actuation of trailer park (emergency) or tractor bobtail position
To actuate the trailer brakes only, pull out the trailer air supply knob (1).
The trailer brakes are now applied whether emergency or spring brakes
are used on the trailer.
This mode is also used when the tractor or truck with trailer is used
during bobtail operation.
117
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
A noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may
be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with
noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps,
wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the
vehicle’s ABS. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a
qualified service technician.
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensating for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS-equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
ABS warning light
The ABS warning light in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on and the engine is off. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on after the vehicle reaches
5–10 mph (8–16 km/h), or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be
serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains
illuminated. (If your parking brake warning light illuminates, have your
vehicle serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the ABS is
required, apply continuous full force on the brake. The ABS will be
activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control
of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you
to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop.
• The ABS does not decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes or
always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop.
118
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
TRACTION CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control™ system. This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads, by reducing engine power and/or selectively applying
the rear brakes. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of
available traction in these conditions.
Note: The traction control system will not apply the brakes when the
vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
During Traction Control™ operation,
the traction control light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly
and the engine will not “rev-up”
when you press further on the
accelerator. This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for
concern. If the traction control light does not flash during a traction
control event or stays illuminated, the system is not functioning properly,
take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
When the Traction Control™ switch,
located on the instrument panel, is
activated standard Traction
Control™ will change to Off Road or
Mud/Snow traction mode, the
traction control light will be
illuminated and flash slowly. If a
traction event occurs, in either
mode the traction control light will
flash rapidly. The standard Traction
Control™ can be selected by
pressing the Traction Control™ switch again or will be automatically
selected at next ignition cycle.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching to the Off Road or Mud/Snow Traction Control™
mode. This may allow excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and
enable a successful “rocking” maneuver.
119
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction
Control™ event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
AIR SUSPENSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The vehicle must not be operated without air in the suspension
springs. Operating the vehicle without air in the air suspension springs
will damage the suspension, degrade ride performance and may cause
property damage.
The suspension system automatically adjusts to different loads to
maintain a constant frame height. The system allows for ease of vehicle
loading and provides improved vehicle ride and increased driver comfort.
Air suspension dump switch
The system is controlled by a switch
located on the instrument panel.
The switch will operate only when
the ignition is in the accessory or on
positions and the air tanks have
sufficient pressure to fill the air
springs. When the ignition is turned
off, the suspension will remain in
whatever state it was last set.
Note: The suspension will dump air when the ignition is in the accessory
or on position, but will only fill when the ignition is in the on position.
When the upper portion of the switch is pressed air supplied to the air
spring is exhausted, lowering the frame for loading. Pressing the lower
portion of the switch causes air to fill the air springs so the vehicle will
remain at normal ride height.
120
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Tractor-trailer connections
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, use extreme
caution when making brake and light connections. Inclement
weather and accumulated road contamination deposits on handhold
and stepping surfaces require extra care to avoid slip and falls. Provide
adequate lighting of working areas.
WARNING: Do not climb on the back of the tractor unless it
has been provided with a deck plate and handholds. Use a
three-point stance when climbing up and down from a deck plate. Do
not jump from the vehicle. Whenever possible, make all connections
while standing on the ground.
Connecting and disconnecting a trailer with air suspension
When connecting to a trailer:
• Press the lower portion of the switch and air will exhaust from the air
suspension system.
• After making the connection to the trailer, press the upper portion of
the switch, then raise the landing gear.
When disconnecting the trailer:
• Lower the landing gear, then press the lower portion of the switch.
• Disconnect the brake hoses, trailer-side and rear light connectors,
then pull the release lever on the fifth wheel.
The upper portion of the switch must be pressed before operating with a
trailer or operating in the bobtail mode.
Suspension conversions
It is not recommended, or approved, that suspension conversions be
performed. However, it is understood that, on occasion, aftermarket
add-on suspensions are installed by others on the truck chassis which
allow operator control for weight transfer from other axles (i.e., air lift
axles).
WARNING: When operating a loaded vehicle, the driver must
keep all adjustable axles on the ground at all times, supporting
their share of the vehicle’s load. Failure to do so can overload other
axles, tires, wheels, springs, steering components, brakes and frames,
resulting in early component failure, loss of vehicle control, possible
property damage and personal injury.
121
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Main transmission, auxiliary transmission, transfer case and power
take-off (PTO) control shift patterns can be found on a placard or decal
on the driver’s sun visor, on the instrument panel or on the shift control
itself.
The main transmission control is used to select the various gear ratios or
speeds of the transmission. Selecting D (Direct Drive), does not change
the transmission gear ratio, but is used where the gear ratios in the main
transmission are adequate to handle the vehicle operation.
If the transmission fails to shift properly, check the inline 10A fuse
located in the battery cables above the battery.
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the
gearshift lever between positions. If you don’t hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and cause property
damage, personal injury or death.
Allison 2200 with park pawl feature
Note: For Allison automatic transmission-equipped vehicles, also refer to
the separate Allison Transmission Operator’s Manual.
A parking pawl effectively grounds the transmission’s output shaft
preventing rotation of the driveline. If the vehicle is stationary, selecting
the P (Park) position places the transmission in neutral and engages the
parking pawl (always use the parking brake, also).
Note: If the P (Park) position is selected when the vehicle is in motion,
the parking pawl mechanism will ratchet and NOT hold the truck.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully. Do not use the
gearshift in place of the parking brake.
WARNING: To avoid sudden, unexpected vehicle
movement and possible personal injury or death:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift the transmission into P (Park). Slowly lift your foot from the
brake pedal to engage the transmission parking pawl mechanism.
3. Apply the parking brake and make sure it is holding properly. Do not
rely solely on the parking mechanism of the transmission.)
4. Turn the engine off when you leave the vehicle. Never leave the
vehicle unattended when the engine is running.
122
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Allison 2500
This transmission is available with a column-mounted gearshift lever. The
gear positions are displayed on the RNDL in the instrument cluster.
WARNING: To avoid sudden, unexpected vehicle
movement and possible personal injury or death:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
3. Apply the parking brake and make sure it is holding properly.
4. Turn the engine off when you leave the vehicle. Never leave the
vehicle unattended when the engine is running.
Allison 3000 series
Two modes are available for the Allison 3000 Series: Performance and
Economy. Performance mode will give you the best all-around
transmission operation; Economy provides operation at lower engine
RPM while maintaining adequate performance. The transmission will
automatically default to Performance mode when you start the engine.
Pressing MODE on the shifter will activate the Economy mode; this will
also illuminate the Mode ON lamp.
If the engine speed is above idle when a gear is selected using the
shifter, the vehicle will not move. To move the vehicle, the shifter must
be moved to re-select a gear after the engine speed returns to idle.
Note: For more information regarding the Allison 3000 Series, refer to
the separate Allison 3000 Series Operator’s Manual.
Torque lock
If your vehicle is parked on an incline and P (Park) is not properly
engaged (The parking brake is not applied before the transmission is
shifted into P [Park]), the weight of the vehicle may generate an
excessive amount of torque on the park pawl. In this situation, it may be
difficult to shift the transmission out of P (Park). Hold the brake pedal
down while shifting out of P (Park), then release the parking brake.
123
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Allison 3000 series push-button shifter
To shift the transmission into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive), press the
brake pedal, then press R or D, then
release the brake pedal. To select a
lower range when in D (Drive),
press the down-arrow button. To
select a higher range when in D
(Drive), press the up-arrow button.
To place the transmission in N
(Neutral), press N.
Automatic transmission fluid operating temperatures
Allison 2200/2500 – The sump/fluid reservoir temperatures should not
exceed 250°F (120°C). The converter temperature should not exceed
300°F (144°C).
Eaton UltraShift transmission (if equipped)
The Eaton UltraShift is a transmission that can automatically select and
engage the proper transmission gears. Vehicles equipped with this
transmission do not have a clutch pedal. For operating instructions refer
to the Eaton UltraShift Driver Instructions manual.
Eaton UltraShift push-button shifter
For operation of the push-button
shifter, refer to the Operation —
Shift Console Positions section of
theEaton UltraShift Driver
Instructions manual.
124
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not ride or slip the clutch as this will cause unnecessary heat and
wear. Maintain the specified clutch adjustment to prolong its life and
regularly inspect the clutch control linkage for tightness. Refer to the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for other maintenance
information. When adjustment of the clutch is necessary, it is very
important that the work be performed properly or early clutch failure
may result and a costly clutch overhaul may become necessary. Clutch
work should only be performed by a qualified technician.
Engaging the clutch
• Always start in the proper gear. An empty vehicle can start in a
higher gear than a fully loaded vehicle. Starting in too high a gear can
cause clutch slippage and excessive heat and wear on the clutch. A
gear that will start the vehicle moving at idle speed is the correct gear.
If the engine has to be revved to get the vehicle going, the gear
selection is too high.
• Do not shift until the vehicle has reached the proper speed.
Upshifting before the vehicle has reached the proper speed can cause
clutch slippage and excessive heat and wear on the clutch.
• Never hold a vehicle on a grade with the clutch. This will cause
the clutch to slip and can actually burn up the clutch.
• Never coast with the clutch disengaged. The high RPM
(sometimes over 10,000), can actually burst the facing material of the
clutch.
• Never engage the clutch while coasting. Re-engaging the clutch
after coasting may not only cause a great shock to the clutch, but the
whole drivetrain. Internal engine damage and/or clutch and flywheel
failure can result from this.
If your vehicle’s transmission is equipped with a ceramic clutch, you
must start the vehicle moving in first gear and engage the clutch before
pressing the accelerator at idle. Also, don’t try to slip the clutch by
raising engine RPM and riding or feathering the clutch pedal since the
vehicle will experience erratic engagement. Erratic engagement can
cause the engine stalling and potential serious damage to the vehicle’s
driveline components.
125
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Clutch brake (vehicles equipped with a non-synchronized
transmission) - Vehicle stationary
A clutch brake is used to stop transmission input shaft rotation so that
the initial 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear selection can be accomplished
when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running at idle speed.
Clutch brake application occurs in the last inch (25 mm) of clutch pedal
travel.
When using the clutch brake, fully press the clutch pedal and shift the
transmission into 1 (First) or R (Reverse). If the transmission won’t go
into one of these gears, slowly release the clutch pedal while applying
light pressure on the transmission shift lever until it shifts into gear.
Note: After engagement of 1 (First) gear, do not use the clutch brake
for upshifting or downshifting. If you do, clutch brake life will shorten
and gear selection shift efforts may increase.
Double-clutch procedures - vehicles equipped with a
non-synchronized transmission
In order to properly upshift or downshift, perform the following steps:
1. Press the clutch pedal to disengage the clutch.
2. Shift the transmission into neutral.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
If upshifting, wait until the engine speed matches the transmission
speed of the gear you are selecting.
If downshifting, accelerate the engine until the engine speed matches
the input speed of the gear you are selecting. Press the clutch pedal
immediately and shift into the desired gear, then release the clutch
pedal.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Continued use of a damaged or worn clutch, prolonged clutch
slippage or downshifting at excessive speeds can result in a failure of the
engine, transmission or clutch components.
Note: To avoid premature clutch wear and failure, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use it to hold the vehicle at a
standstill on an upgrade as when waiting for a traffic light.
126
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Manual transmission shift patterns
are displayed on either the shift
lever knob or the sun visor.
R
1
3
5
2
4
6
Study this information carefully before you drive the vehicle even though
you may be familiar with similar units. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle without knowing the exact shift pattern of the transmission.
Consult your authorized dealer if any questions exist as to the shifting
instructions posted in your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not coast the vehicle with the clutch pedal
pressed or with the transmission in neutral. This practice could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Driving hints
The following driving hints are provided as a brief, general guide in
operating the different manual transmissions used in your vehicle.
• When shifting into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) with vehicle standing still,
quickly release and press the clutch pedal (if necessary to complete
gear engagement).
• Always use the lowest (or most appropriate) gear to start the vehicle.
• Always use a gear ratio low enough to allow the engine to operate
above the minimum engine operation speed range.
• Do not lug the engine.
• Do not slam or jerk the gearshift lever into gear.
• When more power is required, shift to a lower gear and accelerate the
engine near the governed speed.
Shifting with a synchronized transmission
With the clutch pedal pressed in, use 2 (Second) gear synchronizer to
stop the clutch disc rotation; this allows smooth engagement of 1 (First)
or R (Reverse). To complete the gear engagement, it may be necessary
to apply light pressure to the gearshift lever during initial engagement of
the clutch. It takes a second or two to match gear speeds; steady
127
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
pressure on the gearshift lever will help the synchronizer perform its job
more quickly. If the gearshift lever is forced into position, this action
defeats the purpose of the synchronizer by causing gear clash.
Shifting with a non-synchronized transmission
Refer to Clutch brake and Double clutch procedures in the Clutch
section of this chapter.
Operating the Eaton FS-5205A 5–speed transmission
The 5-speed transmission is
equipped with five forward gears
R
2
4
and one reverse. The 2nd, 3rd, 4th
and 5th gears are synchronized. The
shift pattern is embossed on the
1
3
5
gear shift knob.
Do not shift the transmission into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving as this could damage the transmission.
To go forward
With the engine idling, press the clutch pedal in and shift into 1 (First).
Engage the clutch while pressing the accelerator to start forward.
Operate the clutch and upshift as required by driving conditions.
To go backward
Reverse is obtained by putting the gearshift lever in R (Reverse) and
engaging the clutch while pressing lightly on the accelerator.
Operating the Eaton FS–5406A, FS–5406N, FS–6406A and
FSO–6406A 6-speed transmissions
These 6-speed transmissions are
equipped with six forward gears and
one reverse. All the forward gears
R
1
3
5
are synchronized. The shift pattern
is embossed on the gear shift knob.
2
4
6
Do not shift the transmission into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving as this could damage the transmission.
128
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
To go forward
With the engine idling, press the clutch pedal in and shift into 1 (First).
Engage the clutch while pressing the accelerator to start forward.
Operate the clutch and upshift as required by driving conditions.
To go backward
Reverse is obtained by putting the gearshift lever in R (Reverse) and
engaging the clutch while pressing lightly on the accelerator.
Operating the Spicer ES56-7B and ES066-7B 7-speed
transmissions
These 7-speed transmissions are
equipped with seven forward gears
and one reverse. The 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
R
2
4
5th, 6th and 7th gears are
synchronized. The shift pattern is
embossed on the gear shift knob.
1
3
5
6
7
Do not shift the transmission into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving as this could damage the transmission.
To go forward
With the engine idling, press the clutch pedal in and shift into 1 (First).
Engage the clutch while pressing the accelerator to start forward.
Operate the clutch and upshift as required by driving conditions.
To go backward
Reverse is obtained by putting the gearshift lever in R (Reverse) and
engaging the clutch while pressing lightly on the accelerator.
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Vehicles equipped with an Allison automatic transmission (except
Allison 3000 Series applications and vehicles equipped with a
Caterpillar engine)
The PTO can be operated while the vehicle is standing or moving. To
engage the PTO, apply the brakes and shift to any gear other than N
(Neutral), then engage the PTO.
129
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If engagement is prevented by the gear teeth not meshing properly,
release the brakes and allow the vehicle to creep slightly or shift the
selector to N (Neutral) and then back into gear. The PTO should never
be engaged by clashing the gear teeth as this may damage the PTO unit
and the transmission PTO drive gear teeth. This could result in further
damage to the transmission and PTO.
PTO operation with vehicle stationary
Stop the vehicle, idle the engine and set the parking brake. Make sure
the gear selector is in any forward drive range, then engage the PTO.
After the PTO is engaged, move the range selector to N (Neutral).
Increase the engine speed until the desired power take-off operation
speed is obtained. To disengage the PTO after operation with the vehicle
standing, release the throttle, allow the drive equipment to come to a
stop, and then disengage the PTO.
WARNING: When the PTO is operated with the vehicle
stationary, the transmission must be placed in N (Neutral) with
the parking brake set. If the transmission is not in N (Neutral) and is
equipped with a remote throttle control, an increase in engine speed
can overpower the parking brake and cause the vehicle to move,
possibly resulting in personal injury and/or property damage.
PTO operation while vehicle is moving
After the PTO is engaged for driven vehicle operation, shift to the
desired range and drive the vehicle. The speed of the PTO, during this
period of operation, will always maintain direct relation to vehicle speed.
PTO speed will decrease in relation to vehicle (transmission output)
speed as shifts to a higher gear occur. When operating the PTO while the
vehicle is moving, the PTO may be disengaged whenever it is no longer
required. When there is no load on the PTO gear, it can be pulled out of
engagement.
Vehicles equipped with an Eaton UltraShift transmission
Refer to the operation Transmission Power Take Off section of the
UltraShift Driver Instructions Manual.
130
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Vehicles equipped with an Allison 3000 Series automatic
transmission
The PTO drive gear is engine-driven and provides direct engine power.
The PTO can be operated when the vehicle is either stationary or
moving.
The PTO gear is in constant mesh with the drive gear in the torque
converter housing. A friction clutch or constant drive is used to transmit
power to the PTO.
Vehicles equipped with a Caterpillar engine
The PTO will only operate if the transmission is in N (Neutral). This
feature can be overridden by a special service tool; see your dealer or
service representative for more information.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission
Transmission-mounted PTO units are available for local installation on
your vehicle. See your Body Builder’s Layout Book for restrictions on
use and installation of PTO units.
To engage the PTO unit, stop the vehicle and place the transmission in N
(Neutral). Press the clutch and allow the gears to stop rotating, then
engage the PTO unit. The PTO can also be selected with the
transmission in gear as long as the clutch is pressed.
When operating the PTO with the vehicle stationary, first set the parking
brake (chock the wheels if the vehicle is on a hill or another uneven
surface).
REAR AXLE INFORMATION
Axle operating temperature normally will not exceed 100°F (38°C). If
the operating temperature exceeds 230°F (110°C), the rate of axle
lubrication oxidation will increase and shorten the life of the lubricant
and seals, requiring axle lubrication changes to become more frequent to
preserve the axle. Extreme Pressure (EP) lubricants should not be run
consistently above 230°F (110°C).
Gross axle weight
Your truck has gross axle weight, gross vehicle weight and gross
combination weight ratings. Do not exceed these ratings.
131
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Exceeding these ratings by overloading can cause
component failure resulting in property damage, personal injury
or death.
Rear axles with locking or limited-slip differentials (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a locking or limited-slip differential, note
the following:
• Power will be transmitted to the opposite wheel should one of the
wheels begin to slip.
• Both wheels must be raised off the ground should it be necessary to
operate one wheel with the vehicle stationary.
WARNING: If both wheels are not raised off the ground, the
one wheel that is not raised may pull the vehicle off its support,
possibly resulting in personal injury
Driver-controlled differential lock
To prevent the vehicle from moving when servicing the wheels, tires or
brakes, turn the engine off and raise all drive wheels of the locker
differential axle. Axles equipped with NoSPIN Detroit Locker differentials
deliver power to both wheels even when only one wheel is on the
ground.
WARNING: Failure to raise all drive wheels with this type of
differential could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly,
resulting in property damage, personal injury or death.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both drive
wheels are on a slippery surface.
WARNING: Sudden accelerations on slippery surfaces could
cause the wheels to spin, the vehicle to turn sideways on a
crowned road surface or in a turn, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle
control and personal injury.
Some Dana/Spicer drive axles have a driver-controlled differential lock.
The differential lock can lock or unlock the differential when the vehicle
is moving or stopped. When extra traction is required, the differential
lock will provide full power to both axles.
132
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
When the differential is locked, the vehicle’s turning radius will increase
(vehicle will “under-steer”)
The differential can be locked or unlocked when the vehicle is moving at
a constant speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h) and while the wheels
are not slipping. The differential must not be locked when the vehicle is
traveling down steep grades and traction is minimal.
Note: Never use the differential lock at vehicle speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The differential lock and differential lock light will automatically
disengage at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). The differential lock will
remain off until either the vehicle is restarted or the differential lock
switch is turned off then back on.
Axle conversions
It is not recommended, or approved, for axle conversions to be
performed. However, it is understood that, on occasion, aftermarket
add-on axles are installed by others on the truck chassis which allow
operator control for weight transfer from other axles (i.e., air lift axles).
WARNING: When operating a loaded vehicle, the driver must
keep all adjustable axles on the ground at all times, supporting
their share of the vehicle’s load. Failure to do so can overload other
axles, tires, wheels, springs, steering components, brakes and frames,
resulting in early component failure, loss of vehicle control, possible
property damage and personal injury.
TWO-SPEED REAR AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
A two-speed rear axle allows the driver to select a LO range for greater
pulling power and a HI range for greater road speed and fuel economy.
These ranges can also be used to provide additional steps between
transmission shifts when driving on steep grades and/or fuel economy
may be factors.
Note: Do not shift between ranges when the speed control is on.
WARNING: Never shift a two-speed axle when descending a
steep grade as this may cause loss of vehicle control and result
in personal injury.
133
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Axle shifting
Manual transmissions:
• To downshift, select the next lower gear, release and press the
accelerator pedal rapidly, or while holding the accelerator pedal down,
release and engage the clutch rapidly. Note: The clutch method is
recommended when driving at slower speeds.
• To upshift, keep the accelerator pedal down, select the next higher
gear, release the accelerator and pause until the axle upshifts. Note:
De-clutch for smoother axle upshifts when driving at slower speeds.
Automatic transmissions:
• Use LO range for when you drive
a fully loaded vehicle on a severe
grade or in congested traffic. To
activate LO range, press the
upper portion of the switch.
• Use HI range for all normal
driving conditions with a lightly
loaded or partially loaded vehicle.
To activate HI range, press the
lower portion of the switch.
2SPD
LOW
Note: You cannot split-shift with an automatic transmission. Also,
downshifting above 40 mph (64 km/h) may result in transmission or axle
damage.
Shifting the axle from LO to HI range - vehicle stopped
Place the transmission in N (Neutral), then press the lower part of the
switch.
Shifting the axle from LO to HI range - vehicle moving
Accelerate to approximately 35 mph (56 km/h), press the lower part of
the switch while the transmission is in N (Neutral), then release and
apply the accelerator.
Shifting the axle from HI to LO range - vehicle stopped
Place the transmission in N (Neutral), then press the upper part of the
switch.
Note: Do not shift the axle to LO range with the vehicle in motion.
134
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Split-shifting (combined axle and transmission shift - manual
transmissions only)
Ratio
combination
Transmission
gear
Axle range
Split-shift sequence
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1st
1st
2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 4th 4th 5th 6th 6th
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
8
9
HI
10
LO
LO
11
HI
To downshift the axle to a slower ratio and shift the transmission, shift
the transmission and move the control switch to the lower ratio before
the clutch is re-engaged.
To upshift the axle and shift the transmission, move the control switch
to a faster ratio and make the transmission shift in the usual manner.
Ratio extender use
Low End
A two-speed axle can be used as a ratio-extender when split shifting is
not necessary. For low end use, just shift the axle into LO to start out,
and shift to HI when the extra torque is no longer needed.
Transmission
(5-speed)
Two-speed axle
1st
1st
2nd
3rd
Axle
low
4th
5th
6th
Axle high
High End
To use the two-speed axle as a high end ratio-extender, stay in the LO
range for normal upshifts and only shift the axle to HI on the freeway for
greater road speed.
Transmission (5-speed)
Two-speed axle
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Low for gradeability
5th
6th
Speed
Axle
high
135
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
MAXIMUM VEHICLE LOADING
Every vehicle manufactured by Ford Motor Company is supplied with
information on the Safety Compliance Certification Label, located on
either the B-pillar or the driver’s door edge, listing the maximum loading
for the vehicle (GVWR), and its axle systems (GAWR) at the tire to
ground interface.
Under no circumstances should your vehicle be loaded in excess of the
GVWR or GAWR. It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure that neither
the axle capacities, spring capacities, tire capacities nor the vehicle rated
GVWR is exceeded.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
136
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Unloaded or lightly loaded vehicles
The braking system has been designed to safely stop your vehicle when
fully loaded to its GVWR.
WARNING: When operating empty or lightly loaded, sudden or
hard braking may induce wheel lockup with loss of vehicle
control and the possibility of accident and serious injury, especially on
wet or slippery road surfaces.
TRAILER TOWING
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
2nd unit bodies are not included in maximum trailer weight ratings. The
weight of the additional “body” must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Model
Maximum
Maximum
GVWR - lb.
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
(kg)*
F-650 Regular/Super/Crew Cab
26000 (11793)
40000 (18143)
F-750 Regular/Super/Crew Cab
30000 (13608)
45000 (20412)
F-750 Regular/Super/Crew Cab
33000 (14969)
60000 (27216)
* Figures shown are the maximum available for each model. Actual
ratings may be less, depending on your transmission. Check with your
sales consultant for the exact rating on your vehicle.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
137
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Your vehicle may be
equipped with one of two possible trailer wiring designs. Make sure all
running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
See your dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle
starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
138
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, use a lower gear. This will
also assist in transmission cooling.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCW, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to Lubricant specifications in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification. Remember that
regardless of the rear axle lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first
500 miles (800 km) of a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles
(800 km) of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with
no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(if available on your automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual
transmissions and automatic transmissions without a P [Park]
position).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
139
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
WARNING: Failure to follow the fifth wheel manufacturer’s
instructions for hooking and unhooking as well as sliding the
fifth wheel could result in an accident, personal injury or death.
WARNING: When the tractor and trailer are parked unattended,
the trailer brake hand control should never be used to apply the
brake, since air may leak from the system, allowing vehicle movement,
resulting in possible property damage, personal injury or death.
Before hook-up, make sure:
• The fifth wheel jaws are fully opened.
• The fifth wheel is fully tilted back to prevent body damage when the
tractor is backed under a trailer.
• The trailer wheels are blocked and the trailer spring brakes are
adjusted and applied. Never chase a trailer.
• The brake hoses and light cords are clear of the fifth wheel.
Hook-up
1. Back the tractor squarely under the trailer, engaging the fifth wheel
jaws on the kingpin. Always back-up slowly, making sure the trailer is
neither too high nor too low. Avoid backing under the trailer from an
angle.
2. Connect the service and emergency brake hoses and trailer light
connector. Refer to Tractor-trailer connection in the Air suspension
section of this chapter, adhering to the warning and using the three-point
stance while connecting and disconnecting the trailer.
3. Inspect the jaws of the fifth wheel to be sure they have fully closed on
the trailer kingpin and the trailer plate is resting securely on the fifth
wheel.
4. Be sure the coupler release lever is in the locked position.
5. Charge the trailer brake system. Set the trailer brakes, either with the
hand valve or tractor protection valve. Pull against the trailer for an
additional check of proper hook-up. Do not pull hard enough to damage
or strain the equipment.
140
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
6. Set the tractor parking brakes and fully raise the trailer landing gear.
Refer to Brakes in this chapter for proper operation of the parking brake
and trailer brakes.
7. Check the operation of all trailer lights and correct any lights that may
be faulty.
Un-hook
1. Try to keep the tractor and trailer in a straight line.
2. Apply the parking brakes.
3. Lower the trailer landing gear, making sure it is on solid, level ground.
The weight of the trailer is to be on the landing gear.
4. Block the trailer wheels.
5. Disconnect the brake hoses and light cords. Be sure hoses and cords
are clear.
6. Pull coupler release lever to disengage the fifth wheel jaws.
7. Release the tractor parking brakes.
8. Pull out from the trailer slowly, allowing the landing gear to take the
load gradually.
141
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate
from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and is not applicable to vehicles
sold in Canada. The service is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period (U.S.) of two years
(unlimited miles)
Roadside assistance will cover:
• battery jump start.
• lock out assistance (key replacement is customer responsibility).
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement
location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to
be towed to the nearest authorized dealer more than 35 miles
(56.3 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $100 if the disabled Eligible Vehicles
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
Roadside services.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the Owner Guide
portfolio in the glove compartment.
To receive roadside assistance in the United States, call 1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford will
reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain information about
reimbursement, call 1-800-241-3673.
142
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher control is located
on the steering column, just behind
the steering wheel. The hazard
flashers will operate when the
ignition is off.
Press the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUSING
If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse.
Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
143
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp
Location
Rating
1
20A
2
15A
3
20A
4
10A
5
15A
6
7
8
9
10
11
—
—
5A
5A
15A
5A
Fuse Description
Horn
Flasher relay
Cigar lighter
Data Link Connector (DLC), Engine
diagnostic connector, Parking brake warning
Blend door actuator, Function selector switch
assembly, Trailer tow relay, Trailer ABS,
Daytime Running Lights (DRL), Climate
mode, Heated seats, Exhaust brakes, Back-up
lamps switch
Not used
Not used
Radio, GEM
Power window switch LED and relay
Heated mirrors
Wiper and washer systems
144
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Fuse Description
Location
Rating
12
10A
Brake pedal position switch, Transmission
shift selector, Stoplamp switch, Cruise
switches
13
20A
Cluster, Radio
14
10A
Interior lamp relay
15
10A
Interior lamp relay, Vanity mirror lamps,
Generic Electronic Module (GEM)
16
15A
High beams, Indicator
17
—
Not used
18
5A
Headlamp switch interior lighting
19
15A
Engine control
20
5A
Starting system
21
10A
DRL resistor
22
15A
Air horn, Air suspension dump, Two-speed
axle, Driver-controlled locking differential
23
10A
Flasher relay
24
15A
Vacuum pump motor, ABS relay, Fuel heater
relay, Air dryer
25
10A
Function selector switch assembly
26
10A
Right hand low beam headlamp
27
—
Not used
28
10A
Left hand low beam headlamp
29
10A
Cluster, GEM
30
15A
Allison electronic transmission
31
—
Not used
Relay 1
—
Interior lamps
Relay 2
—
Not used
Relay 3
—
Horn
Relay 4
—
One-touch down window
Relay 5
—
Not used
145
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
503
204
502
304
209
114
110
106
102
117
113
109
105
101
116
112
108
104
115
111
107
103
602
203
501
208
205
202
24
401
118
206
601
303
207
201
23
22
20
302
21
19
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp
Location
Rating
1
15A*
2
30A*
3
30A*
4
15A*
5
5A*
6
15A*
7
15A*
8
25A*
9
20A*
10
15A*
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
301
Fuse Description
Main light switch
Power seat (driver)
Power seat (passenger)
Windshield washer relay, Washer pump motor
Brake warning switch
Air intake heater (Caterpillar engine only)
Brake pressure switches, Stoplamp relay
Fuel heater relay
Ignition switch, Starter cutoff
Air tank moisture removal valve
146
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp
Location
Rating
11
30A*
12
20A*
13
—
14
—
15
—
16
5A*
17
—
18
10A*
19
—
20
—
21
—
22
—
23
—
24
—
101
30A**
102
103
20A**
20A**
104
105
106
107
20A**
20A**
30A**
50A**
108
109
110
111
112
113
40A**
40A**
30A**
30A**
40A**
30A**
Fuse Description
Electronic trailer brake
Passenger compartment fuse box 5 and 21
Not used
Not used
Not used
Bendix Air ABS6
Not used
Fuel transfer pump
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Bendix Air ABS relay (Air brake vehicles
only)
Hydraulic brakes module (Hydraulic brake
vehicles only)
Ignition switch
Ignition switch, Passenger compartment fuse
box fuses 19, 29 and 30
Power point
Power door lock switches
Main light switch, Multifunction switch
Passenger compartment fuse box fuses 1, 2,
3, 4, 12, 13, 14 and 15
Fuel heater relay
Power window relay
Windshield wiper relay
Body builder relay, Parking lamps
Blower motor relay, Blower motor
Heated seats switches, Air ride seat
147
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Fuse Description
Location
Rating
114
—
Not used
115
20A**
Ignition switch, Passenger compartment fuse
box fuses 8, 9, 10 and 11
116
30A**
Left/Right turn relays, Back-up lamp relay
117
20A**
Stoplamps relay
118
60A**
Hydraulic brake vehicles (Trailer tow package
only)
601
60A**
Hydraulic brake vehicles (Trailer tow package
only), Air brake vehicles (Trailer tow package
only)
602
60A**
Air brake trailer tow fuse block
30A**
Hydraulic brake, ABS
201
—
Windshield washer relay
202
—
Wiper high/low relay
203
—
Wiper run/park relay
204
—
Windshield wiper relay
205
—
Body builder relay, right turn
206
—
Body builder relay, left turn
207
—
ABS event relay (Air brake vehicles only)
—
Stop lamp relay (Hydraulic brake vehicles
only)
208
—
Body builder relay, back-up lamps relay
209
—
Auxiliary stoplamp relay
301
—
Fuel heater/transfer pump relay
302
—
Body builder relay, parking lamps relay
303
—
Blower motor relay
304
—
ABS relay, Hydraulic modulator relay
* Mini fuse **Maxi fuse
148
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Relay center
The relay center is located on the instrument panel behind the passenger
side airbag panel. The relays are dependent upon the options on your
vehicle.
Relay Location
EMPTY
INHIBIT RELAY
RUN RELAY
ABS RELAY
FLL PWR BUZZER RELAY
MIER RELAY
RELAY
DRAIN RELAY
EMPTY
FLL PWR WARN RELAY
FAN RELAY
START ENABLE
FLASHER
POWER WINDOW
FULL POWER BUZZER
WARNING CHIME MODULE
Relay description
Not used
Starter cutoff
Run relay
ABS warning indicator
Hydraulic brake buzzer
Eaton UltraShift
Two-speed axle/Differential lock disable
Air tank moisture removal valve
Not used
Hydraulic brake
Eaton Ultrashift fan
Starter cutoff
Flasher
Power window
Full power buzzer
Warning chime module
149
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Trailer tow relays (if equipped)
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Description
Location
Rating
1
30A*
Trailer tow ABS feed (non electric trailer
brake vehicles only)
2
30A*
Trailer tow park/marker lamps
3
30A*
Trailer tow stop lamps
4
30A*
Trailer tow turn/stop lamps (combined)
Trailer tow turn lamps (separate)
5
—
Not used
R1
—
Trailer tow ABS relay (non electric trailer
brake vehicles only)
R2
—
Trailer tow marker lamp relay
R3
—
Trailer tow stop lamp relay
R4
—
Trailer tow tail lamp relay
R5
—
Not used
R6
—
Not used
R7
—
Trailer tow left turn lamp relay
R8
—
Trailer tow right turn lamp relay
*Maxi fuse
150
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Inline fuses
Your vehicle may have several inline fuses located in/on the battery
cables located in the battery box depending on application.
• All Allison transmission equipped vehicles have a 10 Amp fuse located
in the clean power cables located in the battery box.
• All Caterpillar engine equipped vehicles have a 40 Amp fuse located in
the clean power cables located in the battery box.
• All Cummins engine equipped vehicles have a 30 Amp fused located in
the clean power cables located in the battery box.
• All vehicles equipped with an Eaton Ultra Shift transmission have a
30 Amp fuse located in the clean power cables located in the battery
box.
• All Hydraulic brake equipped vehicles have a 40 Amp fuse located in
the clean power cables located in the battery box and in addition
another 30 Amp fuse located in a fuse holder just above the power
distribution center located in the vehicles engine compartment.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Before connecting a fast-charger, booster battery or installing a new
battery, make sure the ground polarities of the fast-charger, booster
battery or alternator (when installing a battery) are matched to the
ground polarity of the vehicle battery. Improper usage of the
fast-charger, hook-up of booster battery or installation of a new battery
can cause damage to the electrical system or to the alternator. Do not
attempt to polarize the alternator.
151
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. Do not attach the
jumper cables to the glow plug relay as this could severely damage the
glow plugs, injector driver module and PCM.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
152
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
153
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
154
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
WRECKER TOWING INSTRUCTIONS
Before moving the disabled vehicle, check for adequate road clearance of
vehicle components. It is recommended the disabled vehicle be unloaded
prior to being towed to reduce any abnormal load to the vehicle
components resulting from the towing procedures. Before towing, be
sure to fully release the parking brake. The spring-actuated type parking
brake can be reset by recharging the air system with at least 64 psi
(441 kPa) of air. If the brake system will not retain air pressure, then the
spring brakes must be released manually. Refer to Parking brake in the
Driving chapter
Note: For towing, make sure the vehicle is securely connected to the
tow vehicle and the tow vehicle parking brakes are applied before
releasing the disabled vehicle’s spring brakes.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or property
damage when manually releasing the spring brakes, be sure to
block the wheels so the vehicle cannot move once the brakes are
released.
Towing the vehicle with the front wheels suspended
When it is necessary to tow a vehicle with the front wheels suspended,
extra precautions must be taken to avoid transmission or differential
damage. Proceed as follows:
• Remove the axle shafts from the axle assembly to prevent the wheels
from driving the differential and the transmission.
155
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• The wheel hub ends must be covered to prevent loss of axle lubricant
and entrance of other contaminants. If the axle shafts are not
removed, removal of the driveshaft is required.
Note: To avoid transmission damage, vehicles should not be towed even
a short distance without suspending rear wheels or removing the axle
shaft or driveshaft.
Note: In the event the chassis is equipped with a tandem axle and the
vehicle is to be towed from the front, the forward rear axle may be
raised to clear the road surface and secured to the frame by chains or
U-bolts, allowing only the rear rear axle to contact the road surface. Axle
shafts must be removed from the rear rear axle assembly. The wheel hub
ends must be covered to prevent loss of axle lubricant and entrance of
contaminants. Use extreme care in securing the chains or U-bolts to
avoid possible damage to the brake lines, hoses or other components.
Towing vehicles equipped with a driver-controlled differential lock
Note: If the vehicle must be towed to a service facility with the drive
axle wheels on the ground, it is necessary to remove the axle shafts
before the vehicle is towed.
1. Shift collar in the locked position
2. Actuator assembly and shift fork
3. Axle shaft
4. Interference between the shift
collar and housing
5. Shift collar in the unlocked
position
6. Outer splines - axle shaft to collar
7. Shift collar and differential case
splines
8. Inner splines - axle shaft to side
gear
9. Side gear
10. Differential (plain) case half
156
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing axle shafts before towing
1. Shift the main differential to the unlocked (disengaged) position. The
differential lock light will turn off.
2. Remove the capscrews and washers or stud nuts and washers from
flanges of both axle shafts.
3. Loosen the tapered dowels in the flanges of both axle shafts by
holding a 11⁄2 inch diameter brass drift or hammer against the axle shaft
center and hitting it with a five or six pound hammer. Note: Do not use
a chisel or wedge to loosen the axle shafts and dowels. Use of a chisel or
wedge can damage the hub, axle shafts and oil seals.
4. Remove the tapered dowels and both axle shafts from the axle
assembly.
5. Assemble a cover over openings of both wheels ends to prevent loss of
lubricant and keep dirt away from the wheel bearing cavities.
Note: One of the axle shafts has two sets of splines. One set to engage
with the differential side gear and one set to engage with the shift collar
for the differential lock. It may be necessary to rotate the shaft slightly
to align the gear spline teeth with the shift collar teeth in order to
remove the axle shaft.
Installing the axle shafts
1. Remove the covers from the wheel ends.
2. Shift the differential lock to the unlocked position (disengaged)
position.
3. Install the axle shafts.
• Place the gaskets on the wheel hub studs.
• Push the right-hand axle shaft and gasket into the wheel end and
housing until the shaft stops against the differential shift collar.
• Push down and in on the axle shaft flange and rotate the shaft until
the splines of the shaft and shift collar are engaged.
• Push the axle shaft further into the housing until the shaft stops
against the differential side gear.
• Push down on the axle shaft flange and rotate the shaft until the
splines of the shaft and side gear are engaged.
• Push the axle shaft completely into the housing until the axle shaft
flange and the gasket are flush against the wheel hub.
• Install the left-hand axle shaft and gasket into the wheel end.
157
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. If tapered dowels are required, install them at each stud and into the
flange of the axle shaft. Use a punch or drift and hammer, if needed.
5. Install the fasteners and tighten to correct torque value. Refer to the
Service Manual.
Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels suspended
Note: To avoid damage to the cab roof or air deflector when towing the
vehicle backward (rear wheels suspended) the air deflector must be
removed.
Whenever possible, it is preferable to tow a disabled vehicle from the
rear by raising the rear of the chassis. When towing a vehicle with the
rear of the chassis suspended, the front wheels must be locked in the
straight-ahead position.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission must have at least 1.0 pint
(0.5L) of transmission fluid drained from the case. This will prevent the
transmission fluid from entering the clutch housing and fluid saturating
the clutch discs. Make sure that the transmission fluid is replaced before
the vehicle is returned to service.
158
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized
dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are
needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty
repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the
vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership
cannot assist you, then contact the Commercial Vehicle Hotline.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,
please contact the Ford Commercial Vehicle Hotline.
Away from home
If you own a F-650 or F-750 and need more help than the dealership can
provide after following the steps provided above call the Ford Fleet and
Commercial Vehicle Hotline.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Commercial Vehicle Hotline
1655 Fairlane Circle
Allen Park, MI 48101
800-782-8627 (option #3)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.fleet.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
159
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In order to help you service your Ford vehicle, please have the following
information available when contacting the Commercial Vehicle Hotline:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you must
directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your
state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
160
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find diesel fuel.
If you cannot find diesel fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of low quality diesel fuel may affect your emissions control
system and may cause engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
Ford dealerships outside of the US & Canada may be unable to support
the F–650/750 due to the specialized training and servicing requirements
of these vehicles. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling
or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East,
contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you,
write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
161
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
162
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
163
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
164
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS
• Clean with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A), which is
available from your dealer.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
Note: To prevent damage to the engine control module, never
spray-wash it directly. Never spray any connector.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
165
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
166
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seat belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your vehicle’s dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of
equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-83)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
167
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Motorcraft
Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S only) (ZC-20)
Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53–A)
Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
168
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
GENERAL SERVICING GUIDELINES AND PRECAUTIONS
As with any machine, care should be taken to avoid being injured when
performing maintenance, repairs or system checks. Improper or
incomplete service could result in the vehicle not working properly
which, in turn, may result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
equipment. It is the operator’s responsibility to see that the vehicle
receives proper care and maintenance. If you have any questions about
performing some service, have the service done by a qualified technician.
Servicing guidelines
When servicing your vehicle, always:
• turn off the ignition unless the particular procedure calls for the
engine to be running.
• set the parking brake or chock the wheels.
• use support stands, not a jack, whenever you must be under a raised
vehicle.
• do not smoke.
• wear safety glasses for eye protection.
• operate the engine in a well-ventilated area
• do not work on the brakes or the clutch unless the proper precautions
are taken to avoid inhaling friction material dust.
• do not wear loose-fitting clothing, hanging jewelry, watches or rings.
• avoid contact with hot metal parts. Allow the hot components to cool
before working with, or around them.
Quality service parts are available through your dealer. If dealer parts are
not used, the owner must make sure that the parts that are being used
are equivalent quality to dealer parts.
WARNING: The use of inferior parts can adversely affect the
quality and reliability of your vehicle which, in turn, can result in
property damage, personal injury or death.
Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle’s electrical components, disconnect
the positive (+) and negative (-) battery cables prior to electric welding.
Attach the welder ground cable as close as possible to the part being
welded. If it is necessary to weld close to an electrical component, it is
recommended that the electronic component be temporarily removed.
Follow the periodic lubrication procedures and regular inspection
intervals as outlined. Have your dealer or service center inspect your
169
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
vehicle at least once a year. Remember that regular maintenance and
replacement of worn components will usually prevent serious problems
from developing later.
WARNING: Making modifications to various parts, components
and systems of the vehicle, such as brake and steering systems
can adversely affect the quality, reliability and operation of your vehicle
and could result in property damage, personal injury or death. Such
modifications must be avoided.
The lubrication intervals present a good opportunity to inspect the
vehicle. It is suggested that the various points listed herein be checked
at the lubrication or other recommended intervals.
WARNING: Failure to properly perform maintenance and
servicing procedures could result in vehicle damage, personal
injury or death.
If the owner/operator of the vehicle is a skilled technician and intends on
performing the vehicle maintenance and service, he is strongly urged to
purchase a service manual.
WARNING: Take care when performing any maintenance,
system check or service on your vehicle. Some of the materials
may also be hazardous if used, serviced or handled improperly and
could result in property damage, personal injury or death.
Air conditioning system checks
Have your air conditioning system checked each spring. The refrigerant
charge, cleanliness of the condenser-evaporator cores and belt condition
are essential to air conditioning performance.
When the air conditioning system is being used daily, remove the fresh
air filter (if equipped) once each season and check for dirt, lint, etc.
Replace the filter if necessary. Vehicles operating in unusually dusty
conditions may require inspecting and replacing the fresh air filter more
often.
Front axle - general service information
Maintaining the front axle alignment to specifications is very important
and should only be performed by a qualified technician. Toe-in
adjustment is particularly important with radial tires.
170
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Check to make sure that the axle mounting U-bolt nuts, attaching or
mounting bolts and nuts are securely tightened. Regularly check front
axle for damage, binding, worn parts and adequate lubrication.
At regular intervals, or during other scheduled maintenance, (tire
rotation/service, wheel bearing service, alignment, etc.) the kingpins
should be checked for excessive wear. Refer to the service manual for
proper procedures.
Toe-in setting - general inspection
Inspecting steer axle tires in the first 3,000–10,000 service miles
(4,800–16,000 service km) will generally show if tires are wearing
normally.
Rapid outside shoulder wear on both tires indicates too much toe-in.
Rapid inside shoulder wear on both tires indicates too much toe-out. In
P&D-type service, left-to-right steer tire tread life differentials up to 40%
can be observed depending on routes and other variables.
Follow the tire manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure for
the tire size, load range (ply rating) and steer axle loading typical for
their operation (each steer axle tire will equal 1⁄2 steer axle loading).
Special applications may warrant a setting based on past experience with
the type of tire operating loads and conditions. Radial tires are more
sensitive to toe-in setting than bias ply tires. While not insensitive to
vehicle alignment, fine tuning school bus alignment to line-haul truck
standards will not drastically improve tire tread life.
It is essential that correct toe-in and tire pressure be maintained for
optimum tire wear.
Rear axle - general inspection
Check to make sure that the axle mounting U-bolts, attaching or
mounting bolts and nuts are securely tightened. Refer to U-bolt nut
torque in this chapter. Regularly check the rear axle for damaged,
binding or worn parts.
NoSpin Detroit Locker positive locking differential
Vehicles equipped with this type differential have the operator’s manual
supplied with the vehicle. Refer to this manual for maintenance checks.
171
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Brake system - general inspection
Your vehicle is equipped with non-asbestos brake linings. However,
exposure to excessive amounts of brake material (whether asbestos or
non-asbestos, fiberglass, mineral wool, aramid or carbon) may be a
potentially serious health hazard.
Note: Persons handling brake linings should follow all precautions listed
below:
WARNING:
1. Always wear a respirator approved by the National Institute of
Occupational Studies of Health (NIOSH) or Mine Safety and Appliance
(MSA) during all brake service procedures. Wear the respirator from
removal of the wheels through assembly.
2. Never use compressed air or dry brushing to clean brake parts or
assemblies.
3. Clean brake parts and assemblies in open air. During assembly,
carefully place all parts on the floor to avoid getting dust in the air. Use
an industrial vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter system to clean dust
from the brake drums, backing plates and other brake parts. After using
the vacuum, remove any remaining dust with a rag soaked in water and
wrung until nearly dry.
4. Never use compressed air or dry sweeping to clean the work area.
Use an industrial vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter system and rags
soaked in water until wrung until nearly dry. Dispose of used rags with
care to avoid getting dust in the air. Use an approved respirator when
emptying vacuum cleaners and handling used rags.
5. Worker clean-up: Wash your hands before eating, drinking or
smoking. Vacuum your work clothes after use and then launder them
separately, without shaking them, to prevent fiber dust getting into the
air.
Air brakes - inspection and adjustment
A regular schedule for periodic cleaning, lubrication and adjustment
inspection should be established based on the type of vehicle operation.
It is difficult to predetermine an exact maintenance interval (time or
mileage), since vehicles will be used in a wide variety of applications and
conditions. If you are uncertain of the proper schedule and procedures
for your vehicle, contact your dealer.
172
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Periodic checking of push rod travel or brake adjustment is essential for
effective braking. Push rod travel should be checked every service
interval to determine if adjustment is correct. Brake chamber push rods
on original equipment chambers now incorporate a stroke indicator to
aid in adjustment checks; an orange paint marker near the base of the
push rod. If the push rod is clean and the brakes are out of adjustment,
the orange marker can be seen protruding from the chamber when the
brakes are applied.
WARNING: Do not manually adjust the automatic slack
adjusters to correct excessive push rod stroke as it may result in
reduced brake effectiveness and a vehicle crash. Excessive push rod
stroke indicates that a problem exists with the automatic adjuster, with
the installation of the adjuster, or with foundation brake components
that manual adjustment will not remedy. Seek service from a qualified
facility for excessive push rod stroke.
Inspect the brake lining every maintenance interval. When brake lining or
blocks are worn to within 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of rivets, brake lining must
be replaced. This inspection or adjustment should only be performed by
a qualified technician and must be in accordance with instructions
provided by the service manual.
Do not back off or disconnect the front brakes so that they are less
effective, letting the rear brakes do all the stopping of the vehicle. Do
not overlook the brakes on the trailer, either. Brake condition on the
trailer is just as important as the tractor. Proper brake balance on trucks
and tractor-trailers is essential for effective braking.
Once a year, the entire brake system must be inspected. Check the
following:
• Any rubber as it may deteriorate whenever used. Rubber brake
components should be inspected by a qualified technician and
replaced as necessary. Replacement intervals vary according to the
severity and length of vehicle service.
• Condition of brake drums, brake chambers and slack adjusters.
• System for air leaks.
• Hose or pipes for rust, damage and deterioration.
• Operation of service and parking brakes.
Some parts such as air brake chamber diaphragm, air compressor and air
cleaner should be inspected periodically and replaced if considered
unserviceable.
173
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Air brakes - air dryer
Performance of desiccant or after-cooler type air dryers is dependent on
climatic conditions in which your vehicle is operating. Maintenance
schedules must be established for each specific operation.
The use of an air dryer on a vehicle does not eliminate the need to
periodically drain the air reservoirs.
Air brakes - desiccant air dryer
Inspect for moisture in the air system by opening reservoirs, drain cocks
or valves and checking for presence of water. The presence of small
amounts of water due to condensation is normal and should not be
considered as an indication that the dryer is not functioning properly.
The desiccant cartridge should be replaced or rebuilt when it has been
determined that the desiccant is contaminated and does not have
adequate water absorption capacity. The desiccant change interval may
vary; it is generally recommended that the desiccant be replaced every
12 months (yearly). If experience has shown that extended or shortened
life has resulted for a particular installation, then the yearly interval can
be increased or decreased accordingly.
Hydraulic brakes - inspection and adjustment
A regular schedule for periodic cleaning, lubrication, adjustment and
inspection should be established based on the type of vehicle operation.
It is difficult to predetermine an exact maintenance interval (time or
mileage), since vehicles will be used in a wide variety of applications and
conditions. If you are uncertain of the proper schedule and procedures
for your vehicle, contact your dealer.
Inspect the brake lining every maintenance interval. Establish inspection
intervals that provide for lining replacement before damage to the disc
occurs. Excessive lining wear may expose the backing plate to the disc
causing scoring of the disc faces.
This inspection should be performed by a qualified technician and must
be in accordance with instructions provided by the service manual.
Note: Hydraulic brake system are power assisted. Braking capabilities
will be greatly reduced without engine assist.
174
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Hydraulic brakes - fluid level
Fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the ring on each reservoir fill
port. Do not fill the master cylinder to the top of the reservoir.
Note: If brake fluid requires attention to maintain a proper master
cylinder level, this is an indication of either severe operation (pad wear)
or fluid system leakage. A more frequent and thorough brake inspection
will be required.
Hydraulic brakes - brake lines, hoses and fittings
Inspect these components every 4,000 miles (6,400 km).
• Check lines for kinks, dents, corrosion or rupture.
• Check hoses for abrasions, kinks, soft spots or rupture, collapse,
cracks, twists or loose frame supports. When replacing a hose, be sure
there is adequate clearance to the hose to avoid an abrasion to the
new hose.
• Examine all connections for leaks.
• Repair or replace brake line tubes, hoses or fittings as required.
Driveline parking brake
Parking brake adjustment should only be performed by a qualified
technician, and in accordance with the instructions in the service
manual.
WARNING: Use wheel chocks and exercise caution when
inspecting under the vehicle. A vehicle roll-away could result in
property damage, personal injury or death.
Catalytic converter
If your diesel engine is equipped with a catalytic converter, it is
important to review the maintenance schedule to ensure proper
functioning of the catalytic converter. Also, take precautions not to
damage the catalytic converter when servicing your engine or storing
your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter/muffler, do
not blend waste oil with Diesel fuel. Operate only on ultra low sulfur
(less than 15 parts per million sulfur) diesel fuel with a cetane value of
45 or higher.
175
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Air induction system
Once each year, perform a complete inspection of the air induction
system. In areas where road salt is used, the inspection consists of
disassembling the joints of each aluminum component and inspecting for
salt build-up, presence of chlorine that can cause aluminum particles to
flake off and enter the engine combustion chambers.
If evidence of corrosion is found (usually at the pipe connections), use a
wire brush to clean the inside of the pipes and inside the rubber hoses.
If the intake pipes are pitted at the joint ends, use Motorcraft Silicone
Gasket and Sealant TA-30 to seal the joints. Be certain that no excess
material is on the inside of the pipes that can be pulled into the engine.
If the service condition of the pipes, hoses or clamps is questionable,
replace the defective part(s).
Be sure that prior to reassembly all dust and debris has been cleaned out
of the pipes and couplings with a clean, damp rag.
WARNING: When performing maintenance to any turbocharged
engine with engine air inlet piping disconnected, keep loose
clothing, jewelry and long hair away from the engine air inlet piping. A
turbocharger compressor air inlet protective shield should be installed
over the turbocharger air inlet to reduce the risk of personal injury or
death.
Steering - general inspection
• Ask your service technician to examine the steering mechanism. Only
minor adjustments may be necessary.
• Check tie rod, drag link end clamp bolts and ball joints. They must be
tight.
• Check for installation and spread of cotter pins and tightness of nuts
at both ends of the tie rod and drag link.
• Check that pitman arm (steering arm at steering gear) mounting is
tight and locked. Check system for leaks or hose chafing. Repair at
once.
• Maintain proper steering gear and power steering pump lubricant
levels.
• Regularly inspect steering column joint bolts and steering linkage,
particularly for body-to-chassis clearance.
176
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Note: Have any steering problems corrected at once by a qualified
service technician.
WARNING: Failure to maintain the steering system in proper
condition can cause reduced steering ability resulting in property
damage, personal injury or death.
Tightening steering column joint bolts
As a good maintenance practice, it is recommended that steering column
joint bolts be checked for tightness every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or
annually, whichever occurs first. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Power steering
Whenever the power steering’s hydraulic system has been drained and
refilled for any reason, air must be bled from the system before returning
the vehicle to service. Failure to properly bleed the hydraulic system can
result in degradation of power system performance.
Consult your dealer who is aware of the proper procedures for filling and
bleeding the system.
OPENING THE HOOD
The hood and fenders are held in position by a latch located on each
fender.
WARNING: The parking brake must be fully set before opening
the hood or possible personal injury may occur.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of the possibility of personal
injury, never stand beneath the hood when it is being raised or
lowered.
WARNING: If you must leave the engine running while checking
under the hood, do not allow any loose clothing, jewelry, hair or
other items to get near moving engine components or possible personal
injury may occur.
177
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
To open the hood:
1. Set the parking brake, shift into N (Neutral) (automatic transmission)
or 1 (First) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.
2. Lift upward on the bottom of
each latch.
3. Pull the bottom of each latch
away from the fender.
4. Tilt the hood forward until
stopped by the retaining cables.
178
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
To lower the hood:
1. Push the hood rearward at the top center of the hood above the grille
until closed.
2. Engage the latch on each fender.
3. Push down on the bottom of each latch until locked.
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
The reservoir capacity is 4.0 quarts
(3.8L); use windshield washer fluid
that meets the Ford specification
listed. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
Inspect the fluid level in the washer
reservoir when insufficient fluid is
sprayed.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the washer fluid
reservoir. Engine coolant can severely reduce visibility if sprayed
on the windshield.
179
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
windshield and lock into the service
position.
2. Turn the blade at an angle from
the wiper arm. Press the lock pin
manually to release the blade and
pull the wiper blade down toward
the windshield to remove it from the
arm.
3. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
ENGINE OIL
Refer to your engine operator’s manual for information on checking and
adding engine oil as well as engine oil specifications, capacities and
required maintenance.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with two or three maintenance-free batteries
which are mounted in a covered tray and located on the left frame rail.
The covered battery tray, depending upon application, may also have one
or two steps attached.
WARNING: This vehicle is equipped with more than one
battery, removal of cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system. Be sure to disconnect cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
180
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Covered battery tray shown.
Battery tray with steps similar.
The two rubber straps on top of
the cover must be pulled up and
moved to the side of the battery
in order to remove the lid.
• Battery tray with cover removed.
Maintenance-free batteries do not normally require adding additional
water.
Make sure the battery cover/shield is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the batteries clean
and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened
to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
If the engine cranks but does not start, remove the battery box cover
and check the 40A inline fuse located on the battery cable above the
battery.
181
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
RN
TU
LE
AD
RE
Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center to
find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
182
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT
Refer to your engine operator’s manual for engine coolant checking and
adding instructions as well as engine coolant specifications and
capacities.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you
drive in the winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
• Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
183
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fan clutches
Your vehicle’s cooling system is equipped with a viscous fan clutch.
• The fan clutch helps control cooling, increase performance, improve
fuel economy and reduce noise.
• The fan clutch is controlled by bimetallic spring sensors. Do not
tamper with these sensors as this may change their calibration or keep
the fan clutch from operating at all.
WARNING: Stay clear of the fan/fan area while the engine is
running or possible personal injury may occur.
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR
WARNING: Do not drain water separator while engine is
running. Fuel may ignite if separator is drained while engine is
running or vehicle is moving.
The fuel filter/water separator removes any contaminated particles
and/or water from the fuel before the fuel enters the engine.
Refer to your engine operator’s manual for information on draining and
replacing the fuel filter.
FUEL INFORMATION
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it
stops before completely removing the cap.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
184
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a genuine
Ford or Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for
any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if a genuine Ford or
Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the
fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may
result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only Ultra Low Sulfur (15 ppm Sulfur Maximum) number 1-D
or 2-D diesel fuel in your diesel engine. The engine and exhaust
system were designed to only use this fuel. Look for the
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm Sulfur
Maximum) label on fuel pumps when purchasing your fuel.
Number 1-D or winter blend number 2-D fuel is recommended at
temperatures below 20°F (-7°C) (see Cold weather operation in the
185
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Driving chapter. Diesel fuel containing no more than 5% biodiesel may
be used. Biodiesel fuel is a product that has been converted from
renewable fuel sources, including vegetable oil, animal fat and cooking
oil. Raw or refined vegetable oil, animal fat, cooking oil or recycled
greases should not be used.
Since it is normal for a small amount of unburned fuel to enter the
crankcase and mix with the engine oil, the use of biodiesel requires that
the engine oil and filter be changed more often. Refer to the Exceptions
section of the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for more
information.
Do not use home heating oil or any diesel fuel not intended for
highway use. Red dye is used to identify fuels intended for
agricultural and non-highway use. Damage to the fuel injection
system, engine and exhaust catalyst can occur if an improper fuel
is used. Do not add gasoline, gasohol or alcohol to diesel fuel.
This practice creates a serious fire hazard and engine
performance problems.
NOTE: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
WARNING: Using low sulfur (16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
(greater than 500 ppm) diesel fuel in a diesel engine designed to
use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel increases the likelihood of engine
oil dilution with fuel which may lead to major engine damage.
WARNING: Using low sulfur (16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
(greater than 500 ppm) diesel fuel in a diesel engine designed to
use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel will cause certain emission
components to malfunction which may also cause the Service Engine
SERVICE
) light to illuminate indicating an emissions-related
Soon ( ENGINE
SOON
concern.
WARNING: Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline, gasohol or
alcohol. This could cause an explosion resulting in personal
injury.
186
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not use starting fluid such as ether or gasoline.
Such fluids can cause immediate explosive damage to the engine
and possible personal injury.
Fuel quality
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket additives to your fuel
tank if you use a properly formulated diesel fuel that meets ASTM D 975
specification. Aftermarket additives can damage the injector system or
engine. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in
your fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Do not blend used engine oil with diesel fuel under any
circumstances. Blending used oil with the fuel will significantly increase
your vehicle’s exhaust emissions and reduce engine life due to increased
internal wear.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends diesel fuel specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Diesel fuel that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about fuel that meet the World-Wide
Fuel Charter.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel as this will allow air to enter the fuel system,
which will make restarting the vehicle difficult.
If you have run out of fuel:
• If your vehicle is equipped with dual fuel tanks, add at least
4–5 gallons (15–19 liters) of fuel to each tank before attempting to
restart the engine.
• The fuel system must be primed before attempting to restart the
engine. Refer to the engine operator’s manual for instructions on
priming the engine.
• Use caution not to overheat and damage the starter by cranking
the engine for an excessive period of time. You may need to crank the
engine for a longer time than normal. If the engine fails to start in
30 seconds, turn the ignition to the off position and wait for two
minutes before cranking the engine again.
• Any remaining trapped air will self-purge from the fuel system once
the engine starts running.
187
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• The engine may run rough and produce white smoke while air is in
the fuel system. This is normal and should stop after a short period of
time.
FUEL CONSUMPTION IMPROVEMENT MEASURES
There are two important factors you can control to improve fuel
economy: the mechanical condition of your vehicle and how you drive it.
A properly maintained vehicle will deliver better performance than a
neglected vehicle. Always follow your maintenance schedule to keep your
vehicle in top operating condition.
Also, your driving habits have a significant influence on use of fuel. By
following these suggestions, you can stretch your fuel use:
• Avoid changes in speed as much as possible.
• Anticipate changing traffic conditions. Sudden stops and fast
acceleration waste fuel.
• Avoid extensive idling.
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.
Essentials of good fuel economy
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000–3,000 miles (3,000–5,000 km).
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank(s) on your vehicle is equal
to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank(s) as listed in Fuel tanks in
this chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the Indicated
Capacity and the Empty Reserve combined. Indicated Capacity is the
difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel
gauge indicates empty. Empty Reserve is the small amount of usable fuel
remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of Empty Reserve varies and should not be relied
upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after
the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel
the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to
the empty reserve still present in the tank.
188
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Filling the tank
For consistent results:
• Use the same fill rate setting (low - medium - high) each time during
filling.
• Allow three automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel of a known quality, preferably a national brand.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
• When refueling a vehicle equipped with dual fuel tanks, if the two
tanks are not filled equally, the fuel gauge reading may fluctuate
slightly until the fuel level between the two tanks balance out and
become equal.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Note: For vehicles equipped with dual fuel tanks, engine performance
may degrade if fuel is not added to both tanks when refueling.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank(s) completely and record the initial odometer
reading (in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank(s), record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank(s) and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
• Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
• Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style - good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
189
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
Conditions
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Flat terrain driving improves fuel economy over hilly roads.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the accelerator.
• Close windows for highway driving.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
Your vehicle is equipped with a diesel particulate filter (DPF), as part of
the after-treatment exhaust system, to trap soot and other large particles
produced by the engine combustion process. The soot that accumulates
in the filter must be periodically reduced to ash to prevent excessive
exhaust restriction. The soot reduction process, also known as “filter
regeneration,” is generally performed automatically by your engine and
after-treatment system.
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust
system is very high. Never work around, or attempt to repair,
any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care
when working around the diesel particulate filter. The DPF heats up to
a high temperature after only a short period of engine operation, and
can remain hot even after the engine is turned off. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
190
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Diesel particulate filter regeneration (Caterpillar engine only)
DPF regeneration requires no operator interaction and may occur at any
time. A small increase in engine sound-level during filter regeneration is
normal and should be no reason for concern.
A separate fuel injector/nozzle, which requires periodic cleaning, is used
in the regeneration process. Refer to Caterpillar’s Operation and
Maintenance Manual for details regarding cleaning requirements.
Diesel particulate filter regeneration (Cummins engine only)
Under most operating conditions, DPF regeneration will be transparent
to the operator. A small increase in engine/turbo sound-level is normal
during filter regeneration. If, however, your engine is operated for
extended periods of time under one of the following conditions, operator
assistance may be required to facilitate the filter regeneration process:
• Vehicle is operated in stop-and-go traffic and/or maintains low speeds
as in a city/delivery driving
• Engine is started and shut-off frequently
• Vehicle payload is relatively light
• Vehicle is regularly operated in cold ambient temperatures (i.e. below
0°F [-18°C])
Diesel Particulate Filter Four–Level Loading Chart
Level/Lamp status
Filter status
Requested action
Level 1
Regeneration required. Drive on highway at
DPF lamp solid
highway speeds OR
start “parked
Level 2
Nearly full. Engine
regeneration” to
DPF lamp flashing
performance is limited. prevent loss of engine
(once per second)
performance.
Level 3
Full. Engine is
Perform “parked
DPF lamp flashing +
increasingly limited.
regeneration” to
Service Engine Soon
prevent loss of engine
lamp solid
performance.
Level 4
Over full. Engine
Pull vehicle safely off
Stop Engine lamp
performance is highly
roadway, turn on
solid
limited. Continued
hazard flashers and
operation may result
shut down engine as
in irreparable damage soon as possible. Seek
to the filter.
service immediately.
191
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Instrument cluster lamp(s) will
illuminate and/or flash when
operator assistance is required. In
addition, engine performance will
become increasingly limited above
Level 1.
At Levels 1 and 2, two courses of action may be taken by the operator to
facilitate filter regeneration:
1. The vehicle may be driven on the highway at highway speeds,
2. The operator may perform a parked regeneration by following the
steps in Parked regeneration procedure (Cummins engine only).
At Level 3, performing a parked regeneration is the only available course
of action (short of professional servicing) available to the operator for
regenerating the filter. At Level 4, professional servicing is the only way
to regenerate the filter.
Parked regeneration procedure (Cummins engine only)
WARNING: When performing the parked regeneration
procedure, make certain the vehicle is safely off roadway, and
the exhaust system is away from people, or any flammable materials,
vapors, or structures. Engine speed may increase during parked
regeneration.
Note: Parked regeneration is only available when the DPF lamp on the
instrument cluster is illuminated (solid or flashing).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground and safely off the
road with the exhaust system away from people, flammable materials,
vapors or structures.
2. If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission and a
steering column shift lever, place transmission in P (Park). Otherwise,
place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Remove feet from the accelerator pedal and clutch pedal (if
equipped).
4. Set the parking brake.
5. Within 5 seconds of setting the parking brake, remove foot from
the service brake pedal.
192
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The engine speed may increase slightly. To allow parked regeneration to
continue uninterrupted:
1. The vehicle must remain parked
2. The transmission must remain in P (Park) or N (Neutral) (as
previously described in Step 2).
3. The accelerator pedal, service brake pedal, and clutch pedal (if
equipped) must not be pressed
4. The parking brake must remain set
On average (depending on filter level and other factors), the process will
take 20–30 minutes to complete. The DPF lamp will turn off when the
process is complete. Repeat Steps 1–5, if parked regeneration is interrupted.
To discontinue parked regeneration (Cummins engine only)
Press any of the floor pedals to discontinue parked regeneration.
Diesel particulate filter maintenance and service
The DPF is designed to retain a relatively large amount of residual ash
and provide many miles and hours of maintenance-free operation. At
some point, generally beyond 150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 5,000 hours
of operation (whichever comes first), the DPF will require professional
cleaning to remove the accumulated ash
The exact number of miles or hours of operation will vary greatly
depending upon vehicle/engine loading and operating conditions, ash
content of the engine oil, and quality of the diesel fuel used in your
truck. Adhering to your engine manufacturer’s recommended oil and fuel
specifications will maximize the miles and hours of operation before a
DPF professional cleaning is required. Refer to your engine
manufacturer’s owner’s manual for more details regarding recommended
maintenance and service of your DPF.
Exhaust outlet assembly
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust
system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any
part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
The exhaust outlet assembly on your vehicle is a uniquely functioning
device that accompanies the DPF assembly. It is designed to help control
the temperature of the exhaust during the DPF regeneration process. Do
193
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
not modify or remove this device. Modification of the system
and/or additions of aftermarket devices can reduce the
effectiveness of the system, as well as cause damage to the
exhaust system and/or engine. Any modifications may also
invalidate the vehicle and/or engine warranties. See the vehicle
and engine warranty guides for more information.
The inlet holes in the side of the assembly are functional. These holes
allow outside air to be drawn into the outlet assembly. The holes need to
be kept clear of mud and other foreign material to maintain proper
functionality of the system. One way to keep the holes clear is to spray
the outlet assembly with a hose when washing the vehicle. Failure to
keep the functional holes clear of foreign material may result in the holes
becoming blocked or plugged. Blocked/plugged holes or
modification/removal of the outlet assembly could result in
elevated exhaust temperatures which may result in
vehicle/property damage and/or personal injury.
NOISE EMISSIONS – EXTERIOR
In order to comply with the federal exterior noise regulations, your
vehicle may be equipped with noise emission items. Depending on the
vehicle configuration, it may have all or some of the following items:
Air Intake System
• Air Cleaner: should be inspected and its location should not be
altered. Do not alter inlet and outlet piping.
Body
• Wheel Well: splash shields, cab shields and under-hood insulation
should be inspected for deterioration, dislocation, and orientation.
Cooling System
• Check the fan for damage to blades; replace, if damaged, with the
recommended parts. Inspect for fan to shroud interference, and any
damage to shroud such as cracks and holes.
• The fan ratio should not be changed and the fan spacer dimensions
and positions should not be altered.
• Inspect the fan clutch for proper operation, make sure that the fan is
disengaged when cooling of the engine is not required.
• Check for proper operation of radiator shutters, if equipped. The
shutters should be open during normal operating temperatures.
194
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine and Driveline System
• Transmission Enclosure: inspect for cracks, holes, and tears. Clean
any deposits such as oil, dirt, and stones.
• Engine valve covers and block covers are made to damp out engine
mechanical noise and, if needed, should be replaced with
recommended parts. Check for mechanical isolations.
Exhaust System
• Inspect the exhaust system for leaks at various joint connections and
tighten the clamps.
• Do a visual inspection for cracks or holes in the muffler and tail pipe.
• Always use the recommended parts when items need to be replaced.
• The tail pipe elbow or offset tail pipe orientation must not be changed
from the standard position as originally received.
• To avoid abnormal changes in vehicle sound levels, it is necessary for
the owner to perform inspections and necessary maintenance at the
intervals shown in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid level using the following procedure. If
adding fluid is necessary, refer to Lubricant Specifications in this
chapter for the proper fluid type. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide chapter for the recommended service intervals.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into N (Neutral) (automatic transmission)
or 1 (First) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood.
3. Clean the top of the power steering fluid reservoir.
4. Remove the dipstick from the reservoir and wipe the dipstick clean.
195
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Reinstall the dipstick. Remove it again and check the fluid level.
• If the fluid temperature is at
approximately 68°-120°F
(20°-49°C) (fluid cool or warm
to the touch), check the COLD
ADD
MAX. COLD
FULL
side of the dipstick. The fluid
level should be within the FULL
range
• If the fluid level is below the ADD
line, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until
it reaches the proper level.
• If the fluid temperature is at
approximately 176°–230°F
(80°-110°C) (fluid too hot to
touch), check the HOT side of
ADD
MAX. HOT
FULL
the dipstick. The fluid level
should be within the FULL range.
• If the fluid level is below the ADD
line, add fluid in small amounts,
continuously checking the level until it reaches the proper level.
Note: The fluid level may also be checked by looking at the see-through
plastic reservoir. Make sure that the fluid is within the minimum and
maximum fluid range as marked on the reservoir.
A low fluid level may indicate a leak in the power steering system.
Inspect the power steering system and repair the leak. If necessary, see
your dealer or a qualified service technician.
To avoid damage to the power steering system, do not operate the
vehicle with a low power steering fluid level.
Whenever the dipstick is installed, make sure it is properly seated and
tightened securely.
BRAKE FLUID
Check and refill the Full Power brake fluid reservoir using the following
procedure. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for the
service interval.
1. Clean the reservoir caps before removal to prevent dirt or water from
entering the reservoir.
196
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Visually inspect the fluid level; the level should be at the bottom of
the fill ports.
3. If necessary, add brake fluid from a clean unopened container until the
level reaches the bottom of the fill ports. Do not fill above this line.
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet manufacturer
specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes,
flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and
induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
WARNING: If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will
cause permanent damage to your brakes.
WARNING: Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run
dry. This may cause the brakes to fail.
CLUTCH FLUID/LINKAGE ADJUSTMENTS
Clutch fluid (if equipped)
Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide chapter for the service interval schedules.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, maintain the fluid level at the
step in the reservoir.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet manufacturer
specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product
label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION, contact a
physician or Poison Control Center immediately; on Ford-Motorcraft
products call: 1-800-959-3673 (FORD). Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
197
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Set the parking brake, shift into 1
(First) and turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood.
3. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
4. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
5. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
6. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir.
Clutch linkage (if equipped)
Lubricate the clutch linkage using the following procedure. Refer to the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for the service interval
schedules.
Use a grease which meets manufacturer specifications. Refer to
Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into 1 (First) and turn the engine off.
2. Remove the inspection cover from the clutch housing.
• Transmission and clutch
removed for clarity.
3. With a grease gun, lubricate the clutch release bearing (at one
location) and the clutch release shaft (at two locations) using the grease
fittings provided.
4. Lubricate clutch release wear pads at the two locations where they
contact the clutch release bearing using a brush or similar tool.
5. Install the inspection cover onto the clutch housing.
198
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids.
Call your recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids.
Automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your Allison Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manual for
scheduled intervals for transmission fluid checks and changes. Your
transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be
checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission
slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been operated for
an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic or during hot weather,
the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to
cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and leave the
engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level.
If you must add transmission fluid, make sure the correct type of fluid is
being used. The type of fluid used is indicated in your Allison Automatic
Transmission Operator’s Manual.
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure; an
overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
199
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Eaton UltraShift (if equipped)
The Eaton UltraShift transmission is filled with synthetic fluid from the
factory with no scheduled lube change intervals. This fluid is intended to
last the life of the transmission. However, the system should be checked
regularly to ensure that proper transmission fluid levels remain constant.
Refer to the Eaton Driver Instructions Manual for details.
Manual transmission fluid
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for transmission
fluid level checks and fluid change intervals.
Your manual transmission may be filled with an optional synthetic fluid
which allows the use of extended service intervals. A tag on the filler
plug will identify the use of the synthetic fluid.
Use only fluid that meets manufacturer specifications (refer to
Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved transmission fluid may cause internal
transmission component damage.
Check your transmission fluid level using the following procedure:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Set the parking brake and shift into 1 (First) and turn the engine off.
3. Clean any dirt from around the filler plug.
4. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level.
5. The fluid level should be up to the bottom of the filler plug opening.
6. If necessary, add enough fluid through the filler plug opening so that
the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening.
7. Clean and install the filler plug securely.
Drain and refill your transmission fluid using the following procedure:
1. Drain the transmission while the fluid is warm.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Set the parking brake and shift into 1 (First) and turn the engine off.
4. Clean any dirt from around the filler and drain plugs.
5. Remove the filler and drain plugs and drain the fluid into a suitable
container. Dispose all used automotive fluids in a responsible manner
following your local authorized standards.
6. Clean and install the drain plug securely.
200
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
7. Add enough fluid through the filler plug opening so that the fluid level
is up to the bottom of the opening.
8. Clean and install the filler plug securely.
CHASSIS-MOUNTED CHARGE AIR COOLER
Inspect charge air cooler daily
With the engine off, visually inspect the charge air cooler core assembly
for debris and clogging of external fins. Prior to engine operation,
remove any debris blocking the core.
• Turbocharger-to-charge air cooler
• Charge air cooler-to-intake manifold pipe
• Mounting bracket
• Chassis-mounted charge air cooler core
Inspect air intake piping
• Check for accumulation of salt deposits (where applicable). If present,
disassemble and clean the complete air intake piping system. If the
intake piping is pitted, use Motorcraft Silicone Gasket and Sealant
TA-30 to seal joints against leakage.
• Check for loose hoses and clamps.
• Check for ruptured or collapsed hoses.
• Check air cleaner housing for cracks.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
Periodically inspect electrical connectors on the outside of the cab, on
the engine and frame for corrosion and tightness. Exposed terminals
such as the fuel sender, cranking motor, alternator and feed-through
studs should be cleaned and re-coated with a lubricant sealing grease
such as Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectic
Compound XG-3, or equivalent. This should include the ground cable
connector for batteries, engine and cab as well as the jump starting stud.
Accessory feed connections
Vehicle electrical systems are complex and often include powertrain
components such as engine and transmission controls, instrument panels,
ABS, etc. While most systems operate on battery voltage (12 volts),
some systems can be as high as 90 volts or as low as five volts. Refer to
the Electrical Circuit Diagram Manuals, available from your vehicle’s
201
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
manufacturer, to ensure that any additional body lights and accessories
are connected to circuits that are both appropriate and not overloaded.
No modification should be made to any vehicle control system without
first contacting your dealer.
SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Note: Do not adjust air suspension height to any setting other than the
specified setting. Altering the height setting will change the driveline
angle and may result in unwarrantable component damage, such as
transmission component damage.
Verify drive axle air suspension height and height control valve
performance at engine lube oil change intervals.
Periodically:
• Check condition of spring leaves for evidence of fatigue, bending or
breakage.
• Check condition of suspension mounting brackets and bushings.
• Check that torque rod mounting fasteners are tight.
• Check to be sure the suspension alignment is maintained at all times.
• Check U-bolts after the chassis has been operating under load for
1,000 miles (1,600 km) or six months, whichever comes first, the
U-Bolt nuts must be re-torqued. The U-Bolt nuts thereafter must be
re-torqued every 36,000 miles (58,000 km). The U-Bolt and nut
threads and seats should be cleaned and lubricated to ensure a “like
new” condition when re-torquing.
Note: See the U-Bolt Nut Torque chart later in this section.
Supporting your vehicle for service
When performing service repairs on your vehicle, first prepare the
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Park the vehicle on a level concrete floor.
2. Set the parking brake and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
3. Select a jack with a rated capacity sufficient to lift and hold up the
vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle with the jack applied to the axle(s). DO NOT use the
bumper as a lifting point.
5. Support the vehicle with floor stands under the axle(s). If the axle or
the suspension are being serviced, support the vehicle with floor stands
under the frame side-members, preferably between the axles.
202
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not use a jack when working under a vehicle. It
may give way, causing the vehicle to fall and result in property
damage, personal injury or death. Always use floor stands to support
the vehicle.
FRAME AND TOW HOOKS
Your vehicles chassis is manufactured with frame rails of either HSLA
steel or heat-treated steel. Each must be handled in a specific manner to
ensure maximum service life. Before attempting frame repair or
modification, consult the service manual or your dealer.
It is important, particularly on vehicles where the tow hooks are used
frequently, to inspect the front and rear tow hooks for damage or a loose
mounting.
U-BOLT NUT TORQUE
U-bolt diameter (nominal) (all
spring suspensions)
IROS Air w/15,500 lb. axles and
less
IROS Air w/greater than 15,500 lb.
axles
Hendrickson 23,000 lb. axle
U-bolt diameter (nominal)
Ft. lb.
N•m
260–300
353–407
370–400
502–542
370–400
502–542
Air suspension U-bolt checks and re-torquing procedures
1. Inspect the threads of the U-bolt and nut for rust and debris. Clean
the threads if contaminated.
2. Using a torque wrench, determine if any nuts can be turned with a
force below the specified torque.
3. Using the lowest discovered torqued nut as a starting point, retighten
the nuts using the sequence listed under Air suspension U-bolt and
U-bolt nut installation.
Air suspension U-bolt and U-bolt nut installation
1. Inspect the threads of the U-bolt and nut for rust and debris. Clean
the threads if contaminated.
2. Install the U-bolts and nuts and torque the nuts to 15 ft. lb. (20 N•m),
using a diagonal pattern.
203
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Re-torque the nuts to 100 ft. lb. (136 N•m), using a diagonal pattern.
4. Re-torque the nuts to 200 ft. lb. (271 N•m), using a diagonal pattern.
5. Re-torque the nuts to 400 ft. lb. (542 N•m), using a diagonal pattern.
(For vehicles equipped with 14ACC, 14 ADN and 14ADP axles, do not
use Step 6.)
6. Re-torque the nuts to 425 ft. lb (576 N•m), using a diagonal pattern.
(For vehicles equipped with 14ACC, 14 ADN and 14ADP axles.)
7. Use the same diagonal pattern with each U-bolt nut re-torque.
Spring U-bolt checks
Check U-bolt nuts and re-torque every 36,000 miles (58,000 km) after
initial 1,000 miles (1,600 km) re-torque. The U-bolt and nut threads and
seats should be cleaned and lubricated to ensure peak condition when
re-torqued.
DRIVESHAFT
At the regular lubrication interval, check the universal joints for any
evidence of wear or looseness. Should driveshaft vibrations occur, stop
the vehicle immediately to avoid possible hazardous consequences or
damage to other components.
REAR AXLE LUBRICANT
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for rear axle
lubricant level checks and lubricant change intervals.
Your rear axle may be filled with an optional synthetic lubricant which
allows the use of extended service intervals. A tag on the filler plug will
identify the use of the synthetic lubricant.
Use only a lubricant that meets manufacturer specifications (refer to
Lubricant specifications in this chapter).
Use of a non-approved rear axle lubricant may cause internal axle
component damage.
Checking the rear axle lubricant level
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Set the parking brake and shift into N (Neutral) (automatic
transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.
3. Clean any dirt from around the rear axle filler plug.
4. Remove the filler plug and inspect the lubricant level.
204
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. The lubricant level should be up to the bottom of the filler plug
opening.
6. If necessary, add enough lubricant through the filler plug opening so
that the lubricant level is at the bottom of the opening.
7. Clean and install the filler plug securely.
Draining and refilling the rear axle lubricant
1. Drain the rear axle while the lubricant is warm.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Set the parking brake and shift into N (Neutral) (automatic
transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.
4. Clean any dirt from around the rear axle filler and drain plugs.
5. Remove the filler and drain plugs and drain the lubricant into a
suitable container. Dispose of all used automotive fluids in a responsible
manner following your local authorized standards.
6. Clean and install the drain plug securely.
7. Add enough lubricant through the filler plug opening so that the
lubricant level is up to the bottom of the opening.
8. Clean and install the filler plug securely.
WHEELS
General
Wheel bearings should be inspected, lubricated and adjusted at regular
intervals. This is especially important if operating in deep sand, mud, or
water. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
When installing wheel balance weights, they must be mounted on the
dome-side of the wheel only. Failure to do so may result in loss of wheel
weight and/or damage to brakes or wheels.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel air valves when the road
tires are replaced at the end of their useful life.
205
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Oil lubricated front wheel bearings
During normal vehicle duty cycle, the lube and air inside the hub/wheel
cavity expands and if not vented, causes pressure build-up that could
cause accelerated seal wear.
There are two venting methods:
• a slit or small hole in the rubber check vent or
• the window
You can use either of these methods to prevent pressure build-up.
Normal maintenance
Over a period of time, if not routinely cleaned, a slight film of oil can
collect dirt around the rubber fill plug and face, which could appear to
be a leak. Routine cleaning ensures that the lube level can be easily
observed through the clear window as intended. In situations where the
window is clean on the outside but discolored on the inside, the lube
level may be checked by inserting a finger through the rubber check
vent hole.
The specified lube level for a clear window type hubcaps is from the
minimum line to + 5/16 inch above the minimum line.
If the lube level should suddenly drop dramatically below the minimum
level, see the Workshop Manual for diagnostic procedure.
Installation, tightening and alignment
When installing wheels, be certain that the threads on studs and nuts are
clean to permit correct torque. The mounting surfaces of rims, wheels,
spacer rings and clamps must be free of dirt, rust, lubricants or damage.
Use a wire brush to clean the mounting contact surfaces. Do not use
lubricant on threads.
After the rim or wheel has been properly tightened, it should be checked
for alignment. Rotate the wheel with a piece of chalk attached to a steady,
firm surface, and placed to just barely clear the outside surface of the tire
bead seat. This procedure will point out the high spot. A high spot does
not necessarily mean that the lug nuts have been unevenly tightened. This
condition or misalignment could be caused by a bent wheel.
Use the following installation procedure:
1. Slide inner rear or front tire and wheel in position over studs and push
it back as far as possible. Use care so that the threads on studs are not
damaged.
206
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Disc wheel with flange nuts (hub-piloted)
Front wheel mounting of flange nut
system
1. Flange nut
2. Wheel(s)
3. Brake drum
4. Wheel stud (22 mm)
5. Wheel hub
2. Position the outer rear tire and wheel in place over the studs and
push it back as far as possible. Use care so that the threads on studs are
not damaged.
Rear wheel mounting of flange nut
system
1. Flange nut
2. Wheel(s)
3. Brake drum
4. Wheel stud (22 mm)
5. Wheel hub
207
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Aluminum rear disc wheel with flange nuts (hub-piloted)
2
3
1
4
5
6
1. Flange nut
2. Wheel(s)
3. Brake drum
4. Wheel stud (22 mm)
5. Wheel hub
6. Wheel locator pad
Note for aluminum wheels: Prior to re-installing rear aluminum
hub-piloted wheels, clean each wheel locator pad on the hub from all
dirt, rust and foreign material. Apply a light coat of chassis grease,
never-seize or disc brake corrosion control grease, only to the wheel
locator pad.
3. Run the nuts on the studs until they contact the wheel(s). Rotate the
wheel assembly a half-turn to permit the parts to seat.
4. Draw up the nuts alternately following the crisscross sequence
illustrated under the following wheel tightening sequence illustrations.
Do not fully tighten the nuts. This will allow uniform seating of the nuts
and ensure even face-to-face contact of the wheel and hub.
208
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Wheel tightening sequence:
8–lug wheel
10–lug wheel
5. Continue tightening the nuts to the torque specifications in the torque
chart using the same crisscross sequence shown.
6. After operating the vehicle approximately 50 miles (80 km), check the
nuts for tightness. Some natural seating of parts may be encountered
and the torque on the nuts will drop. Retighten all nuts to specifications.
Once a week, inspect and retighten the wheel stud nuts.
Note: When installing the tire and rim assembly on disc-brake equipped
axles, make sure the tire valve stem clears the brake caliper. The use of
a tire manufacturer’s stem forming tool is the only acceptable method of
obtaining clearance when necessary.
Proper torque
It is important to tighten and maintain wheel and rim mounting nuts to
the proper torque. Loose nuts or over-tightened nuts can lead to
premature wear and possible failure of the wheel and/or mounting
hardware.
209
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing wheel types
Consult your dealer or wheel/rim distributor before attempting any wheel
or fastener changes.
WARNING: Use only the same type and style wheels and
mounting hardware to replace original parts. Failure to do so
may result in an assembly that looks fine, but does not fit together
properly. This could possibly cause wheel or fastener failures which
could result in property damage, personal injury or death.
Note: Do not attempt to mix stud-piloted wheels or fasteners with
hub-piloted wheels or fasteners.
Note: Do not change from aluminum wheels to steel wheels or
vice-versa without changing the mounting hardware required or, with
flange-nut mounting systems, changing the hub and stud assembly.
WHEEL NUT TORQUE
Torque
Ft. lb.
N•m
22 mm
Flange
450–500
610–678
Note: Do not use lubrication on dry threads. Where excessive corrosion
exists, a light coat of lubricant on the first three threads of the stud bolt
is permitted. Keep lubricant away from:
• Hex nut and rim clamp contact surfaces.
• Cap nut ball face and ball seat on the disc wheel.
• Flange nut washer surface and flat on the disc wheel.
Size
Nut mounting
TIRE INFORMATION
Inflation
WARNING: Always maintain your tires in good condition.
Frequently check and maintain correct inflation pressures as
specified by tire manufacturers. Inspect periodically for abnormal wear
patterns and repair/replace cut or broken tire casing. Always use
experienced, trained personnel with proper equipment and correct
procedures to mount or remove tires and wheels. Failure to adhere to
these warnings could result in wheel or tire malfunction, damage to
your vehicle, personal injury, or death.
210
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, always follow
these instructions when mounting radial tires on wheels:
Only personnel that have had proper training and experience should
mount or remove tires from rims or wheels.
Use only heavy-duty rims or approved rims for radial tires. It may be
necessary to contact your wheel and rim distributor to determine if
your rims are approved for radial tires.
If a tube is to be used, make sure special radial tire tubes are used
because of the increased flexing of the sidewalls on radial tires.
Never use anti-freeze, silicones, or petroleum based lubricants when
mounting radial tires. Only an approved lubricant should be used as
an aid for mounting tires.
Always inflate tires in a safety cage.
Do not attempt to mix stud piloted wheels or fasteners with hub
piloted wheels or fasteners. To do so may cause premature wheel
failure resulting in property damage, personal injury, or death.
Do no mix foreign (not made in North America) wheel mounting
parts with domestic (made in North America) parts. Many foreign
wheel components look similar to, but not exactly the same as
domestic made components. Mixing components could cause wheel
or fastener failures and result in property damage, personal injury, or
death.
Do not change from aluminum wheels to steel wheels or vice-versa
without changing the mounting hardware where required or, in some
cases with flange nut mounting systems, changing the hub and stud
assembly. Mixing components could cause wheel or fastener failures
and result in property damage, personal injury, or death.
211
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting the air pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and
property.
212
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the illustration.
WARNING: Do not mount tube type tires on tubeless wheels or
tubeless tires on tube type wheels. To do so could result in tire
or wheel failure and cause property damage, personal injury or death.
Preserving proper inflation pressure is a very important maintenance
practice to insure safe vehicle operation and long life for the tires.
Failure to maintain correct inflation pressure may result in sudden tire
destruction, improper vehicle handling, and may cause rapid and
irregular tire wear. Therefore, inflation pressures should be checked daily
and always before long distance trips.
Follow the tire manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure for
the tire size, type, load range (ply rating) and axle loading typical for
your operation. (Each steer axle tire load will equal 1⁄2 steer axle loading;
each drive tire load will be 1⁄4 the axle loading if fitted with four tires).
213
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Checking inflation
Always check inflation pressure when tires are cold. Never bleed air from
hot tires to relieve normal pressure build-up. Normal increases in
pressure due to service conditions will be 10–15 psi, which is allowable
in truck tires.
Tires should be properly inflated to manufacturers recommended
pressure for the size and service load in which the vehicle is being used.
Refer to the tire manufacturer in which your vehicle is equipped for the
latest information concerning service load and inflation pressure.
It is particularly important to keep moisture from the inside of tires, and
proper selection of air compressor equipment, proper air line routing,
and the use of shop air dryers is strongly recommended to avoid
moisture in the high pressure air used for tire inflation.
Under-inflation
Tires should not be permitted to become under-inflated. Increased
flexing due to under-inflation causes heat build-up within the tire
components. This leads to reduced strength, breakdown of the rubber
compounds, and possible separation of the tire components (i.e., ply and
tread separation and reduced retreadability).
Under-inflation is the primary cause of premature tire concerns including
sudden loss of air. In addition, low inflation causes an increase in rolling
resistance. This results in reduced fuel mileage, a loss in tread mileage,
and uneven wear due to increased tread movement. To determine proper
inflation refer to the tire manufacturer load/inflation guide which can be
found on the tire manufacturer website or at your local truck tire dealer.
Inspection
Check condition of tires for abnormal wear patterns, and proper inflation
pressures. Cut or broken tire casing must be repaired or replaced.
Tires should be inspected for the following conditions. If any are present,
the tire should be removed and repaired, retreaded or scrapped as the
condition indicates.
• Any blister, bump or raised portion anywhere on the surface of the
tire tread or sidewall (other than a bump made by a repair). These
indicate the start of internal separation.
• Any cut that reaches to the belt or ply cords, or any cut that is large
enough to grow in size and depth.
• Any nail or puncturing object.
• If any stone or object is held by a tread groove and is starting to drill
into the tread base, remove the object.
214
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Proper tire inflation, toe-in adjustment, loads, and road speeds are
important factors governing tire mileage, steering ease and maneuverability.
Loads
WARNING: Loading tires beyond their rated capacity decreases
tire life requiring more frequent replacement of tires.
Overloading creates an unsafe condition that may result in sudden air
loss from a tire failure resulting in an accident that could cause
property damage, personal injury or death.
Note: Your GAW/GVW rating is correct at the time of your vehicle
production, and reflects the exact rating of the tires specified. When
replacing tires be sure that the replacement tire load rating (listed in
pounds and kilograms on the tire sidewall) is the same or higher than
the tire that is removed. Failure to do so will adversely affect maximum
load carrying capacity. Tires with the same size specification do not
always have the same load specification.
Matching
Dual Tires: Dual tires should be matched using tires of equivalent size.
Tires which differ more than 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in diameter or 3⁄4 inch
(19 mm) in circumference should not be mounted on the same dual
wheel assembly.
Mixing: Never mix bias and radial tires on this vehicle. Never mix
different tire sizes or constructions on the same axle.
Rotation:
Rotation is always advisable:
1. If front (steering) axle tires become irregularly worn, move to rear
position.
2. In a dual assembly, reverse the position of the tires if one tire wears
much faster than its mate.
3. On the drive axle, if heel and toe wear or alternate lug wear occurs,
rotating the tires from one end of the axle to the other end of the axle
may help even out this wear.
Rotation may not advisable:
1. Front (Steering) Axle: Tires must be removed when tread is worn
to 4/32 inch (3 mm) or less. Retread or rotate worn tires to drive
position. Retreaded tires are not recommended to be used on steering
axles.
215
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Rear Axles: Tires must be removed when tread is worn to 2/32 inch
(2 mm).
If rib tire is used on front axle and lug or off-road type on rear axle
positions:
1. Front (Steering) Axle: Replace tires at front wheels when tread is
worn to 4/32 inch (3 mm) or less.
2. Rear Axles: Tires must be removed when the tread is worn to
2/32 inch (2 mm) or less. Tires identified with the word “re-groovable”
molded on the sidewall can be re-grooved. A minimum of 3/32 inch
(2.5 mm) of under-tread must be left at the bottom of the grooves.
Wheel and tire balancing
Out-of-round or out-of-balance wheels or tires can cause vehicle
vibration, bounce and shimmy. Replace damaged or out-of-round wheels.
Out-of-round tires and wheel assemblies can be corrected by re-clocking
the tire relative to the wheel.
The tire and wheel assembly should then be dynamically balanced.
Wear
Radial tires can exhibit three types of normal wear patterns: 1) Even, 2)
Erosion, 3) Chamfer.
Even wear is a sign that the tire is being properly used and maintained.
Erosion wear has also been called rolling wear, channel or river wear.
Erosion wear is found more often at free rolling tires. This is an
indication that the tire is being used in a slow wearing operation. What
happens is that the belt plies are held very rigid and the tread is not
allowed to distort as it passes through the contact area. Wear will only
occur at the edge of the tread. No corrective action required. If erosion
gets to be 1/16 inch (2 mm) or more, the tire may be rotated to a drive
axle.
Chamfer or shoulder wear, with tires inflated properly, is a normal
tendency of most radial tire designs. If both inside and outside shoulders
are wearing evenly around the tire, no further action is required.
Over-inflation is not effective in correcting this effect.
Tires: Irregular Wear
If irregular wear is present, check the axle alignment, tire pressure,
wheel balancing, shock and suspension component condition, and wheel
bearing end play.
This condition not only shortens tire life, but will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle, which is dangerous.
216
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Rotating tires from one wheel position to another is a way often used to
even out many types of irregular wear or to avoid it altogether. Some of
the more effective tire rotation programs are:
• Steer tires that have developed some type of irregular wear pattern
can be rotated to drive axles if rib tires are being used on all wheel
positions. Applying steer tires to a drive position will often clean them
and they can be moved back to the steer axles or run out to re-tread
stage on the rear axle.
• Another rotation possibility for fleets with rib tires in all wheel
positions is to break in the new steer tires in the drive axle positions,
then move them to steer axles. This will wear away tread rubber
relatively quickly in the early life of a tire when it is most likely to
develop an unusual wear pattern.
• Drive axle tires may be placed on the other end of the same axle so
that direction of rotation is reversed. This is often helpful if a heel and
toe or alternate lug wear pattern has developed.
Irregular wear can be minimized by:
• Using the right inflation pressure for the load being carried.
• Maintaining proper front wheel alignment - especially toe-in - to
specifications.
• Maintaining proper tire and wheel balance.
• Maintaining shock absorbers and suspension components.
Use of tire chains
Refer to chain manufacturer’s recommendation for correct tire chain
usage, installation and removal.
217
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Viscosity /
Ambient
Component
temperature /
Notes
Non-driving front axle
Eaton-Spicer axle Multipurpose EP SAE 75W:
(generic) - front
gear lube of API –40°F to –15°F
axle wheel bearing GL-5 quality
(–40°C to –26°C)
oil
meeting
SAE 75W-80:
MIL-PRF-2105E -40°F to 80°F
specifications
(–40°C to 27°C)
including
SAE 75W-140:
synthetic
–40°F to 100°F
lubricants. Do
(–40°C to 38°C)
not mix
SAE 75W-140:
conventional
–40°F and above
and synthetic
(–40°C and
lubricants.
above)
Lubrication
type
SAE 80W-90:
–15°F to 100°F
(–26°C to 38°C)
SAE 80W-140:
–15°F and above
(–26°C and
above)
SAE 85W-140:
10°F and above
(–12°C and
above)
218
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–80W90–QL
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Lubrication
type
Spicer axle - front Multipurpose EP
axle wheel bearing gear lube of API
oil
GL-5 quality
meeting
MIL-PRF-2105E
specifications
including
synthetic
lubricants. Do
not mix
conventional
and synthetic
lubricants.
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
SAE 75W:
–40°F to 32°F
(–40°C to 0°C)
SAE 75W-140:
–40°F to 100°F
(–40°C to 38°C)
SAE 80W:
–15°F to 70°F
(–26°C to 21°C)
SAE 90W:
10°F to 100°F
(–12°C to 38°C)
SAE 75W-140:
–40°F and above
(–40°C and
above)
SAE 80W-140:
–15°F and above
(–26°C and
above)
SAE 85W-140:
10°F and above
(–12°C and
above)
SAE 140W:
40°F and above
(4°C and above)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–80W90–QL
SAE 90 Hypoid
Gear Oil /
C6AZ–19580–E
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
219
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Viscosity /
Ambient
Component
temperature /
Notes
Note:
Eaton-Spicer axle, EP2 Lithium
Spicer axle - Front complex-based
Eaton-Spicer and
axle wheel bearing moly grease (or
Meritor Easy Steer
grease, tie rod
equivalent)
axles: With chassis
ends, drag link,
GC/LB NLGI #2
load on axle, force
multi-purpose
grease through
kingpin and
bushing
lithium complex thrust bearings;
then with axle
grease
lifted clear of the
floor, force grease
between kingpin
and bushing
surfaces.
Steering
Power steering
MERCON 威 V
—
fluid
Automatic
Transmission
Fluid
Steering gear Ross GC/LB NLGI #2
—
TAS - Output Seal lithium
complex-based
moly grease or
multi-purpose
lithium complex
grease
Steering column
GC/LB NLGI #2
—
U-joints / slip joint lithium
complex-based
moly grease or
multi-purpose
lithium complex
grease
Lubrication
type
220
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
MERCON 威 V /
XT-5-QMC
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
U-joint
Release bearing /
shafts / fork
Reservoir
Engine coolant
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
Driveshaft
—
GC/LB NLGI #2
lithium
complex-based
moly grease or
multi-purpose
lithium complex
grease
Clutch
GC/LB NLGI #2
—
lithium
complex-based
moly grease or
multi-purpose
lithium complex
grease
DOT 3,
—
ESA-M6C25–A or
WSS-M6C62–A
Lubrication
type
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid, PM-1 or
PM-1–C
Cooling system
Refer to engine operator’s manual
221
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Washer fluid
Eaton-Fuller
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
Windshield washer
WSB-M8B16-A2
—
Lubrication
type
Transmission
Petroleum oil:
SAE 50:
Engine oil API-SL Above 10°F
or API-CF
(–12°C)
(MIL-L-2104E or SAE 40:
MIL-L-46152E)
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
Mineral gear oil: SAE 80W–90:
API-GL-1 (rust
Above 10°F
and oxidation
(–12°C)
inhibited)
SAE 75W:
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
Synthetic oil:
CD SAE 50:
Eaton威,
All temperatures
Roadranger威
synthetic CD-50
transmission fluid
222
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate /
ZC-32-A
—
—
—
—
—
Maintenance and Specifications
Viscosity /
Ambient
Component
temperature /
Notes
SAE 50:
Spicer
Petroleum oil:
(non-synchronized) Engine oil API-SL Above 0°F
(lubricants are
or API-CF
(–18°C)
listed in order of
(MIL-L-2104E or SAE 40:
preference)
MIL-L-46152E)
Below 0°F
(–18°C)
Mineral gear oil: SAE 90:
Above 0°F
API-GL-1 (rust
(–18°C)
and oxidation
inhibited) (EP
SAE 80:
gear oils are not Below 0°F
acceptable)
(–18°C)
Synthetic oil:
CD SAE 50:
Synthetic Engine All temperatures
Oil meeting
MIL-L-2104E or
MIL-L-46152E,
API-SL or API-CF
Lubrication
type
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
—
—
—
—
—
223
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Spicer
(synchronized)
(lubricants are
listed in order of
preference)
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
SAE 50:
Petroleum oil:
Engine oil API-SL Above 10°F
or API-CF
(–12°C)
(MIL-L-2104E or SAE 40:
MIL-L-46152E)
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
Mineral gear oil: SAE 90:
API-GL-1 (rust
Above 10°F
and oxidation
(–12°C)
inhibited)
SAE 80W:
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
Synthetic oil:
SAE 50:
Synthetic Engine All temperatures
Oil meeting
MIL-L-2104E or
MIL-L-46152E,
API-SL or API-CF
Lubrication
type
224
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
—
—
—
—
—
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Meritor
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
Petroleum oil:
SAE 50:
Heavy Duty
Above 10°F
Engine Oil
(–12°C)
MIL-L-2104E or
SAE 40:
API-SL or API-CF Above 10°F
(previous API
(–12°C)
designations
SAE 30:
acceptable)
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
Lubrication
type
Mineral gear oil
with rust and
oxidation
inhibitor
API-GL-1 Do not
use
multi-weight
and GL-5 EP
gear oils; they
may cause
transmission
failure or
damage.
Synthetic oil:
MIL-L-2104E or
MIL-L-46152D Do
not use
multi-weight
and GL-5 EP
gear oils; they
may cause
transmission
failure or
damage.
SAE 90:
Above 10°F
(–12°C)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
—
—
Motorcraft SAE
30 Super Duty
Motor Oil /
XO-30-QSD
—
SAE 80:
Below 10°F
(–12°C)
—
SAE 50:
All temperatures
—
225
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Allison
Eaton UltraShift
Eaton-Spicer two-speed axle
Eaton single-speed axle
Viscosity /
Equivalent
Ambient
Ford part
temperature /
name / number
Notes
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Refer to transmission driver instructions manual
Rear axle
RHEOLUBE 362
—
—
(or equivalent)
(Eaton part
number 113741)
Generic lubricant SAE 75W:
Motorcraft SAE
–40°F to –15°F
75W-140
(–40°C to –26°C) Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
SAE 75W-80:
Axle Lubricant /
–40°F to 80°F
XY–75W140–QL
(–40°C to 27°C)
SAE 75W-140:
–40°F to 100°F
(–40°C to 38°C)
SAE 80W-90:
Motorcraft SAE
–15°F to 100°F
80W-90
(–26°C to 38°C)
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY-80W90-QL
SAE 75W-140:
Motorcraft SAE
–40°F and above 75W-140
(–40°C and
Motorcraft
above)
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
SAE 80W-140:
–15°F and above XY–75W140–QL
(–26°C and
above)
SAE 85W-140:
10°F and above
(–12°C and
above)
Lubrication
type
226
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Spicer single-speed axle
Lubrication
type
Multipurpose EP
gear lube of API
GL-5 quality
meeting
MIL-PRF-2105E
specifications
including
synthetic
lubricants
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
SAE 75W:
–40°F to 32°F
(–40°C to 0°C)
SAE 75W-140:
–40°F to 100°F
(–40°C to 38°C)
SAE 80W:
–15°F to 70°F
(–26°C to 21°C)
SAE 75W-140:
–40°F and above
(–40°C and
above)
SAE 80W-140:
–15°F and above
(–26°C and
above)
SAE 85W-140:
10°F and above
(–12°C and
above)
SAE 140W:
40°F and above
(4°C and above)
SAE 90W:
10°F to 100°F
(–12°C to 38°C)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
SAE 90 Hypoid
Gear Oil /
C6AZ-19580-E
227
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Component
Meritor single-speed axle
Lubrication
type
Fill at the factory
with Synthetic
SAE 75W-140,
will have a tag
attached to fill
plug that reads as
follows: “Filled
with synthetic
lube. Do not
mix.”
Multipurpose EP
gear lube of API
GL-5 quality
meeting
MIL-PRF-2105E
specifications
including
synthetic
lubricants. Do
not mix
conventional
and synthetic
lubricants.
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
—
SAE 75W-140:
Above –40°F
(–40°C)
SAE 85W-140:
Above 10°
(–12°C)
SAE 85W-140:
Above –15°F
(–26°C)
SAE 80W-90:
Above –15°F
(–26C)
SAE 75W:
Maximum outside
temperature of
35°F (2°C);
Above –40°F
(–40°C)
228
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
—
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY-80W90-QL
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Motorcraft
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant /
XY–75W140–QL
Maintenance and Specifications
Viscosity /
Ambient
Component
temperature /
Notes
Cab components
Hydraulic lift pump Dexron III
—
fluid
Lubrication
type
Cab latch and lock Mobile SHC 32
levers
Low Temperature
Lubricant (or
equivalent)
Cab latch pivots;
GC/LB NLGI #2
Door check,
lithium
hinges, latches and complex-based
strikers; Seat
moly grease (or
adjuster slides
equivalent) or
multi-purpose
lithium complex
grease
Cab latch pivot
Light engine oil
pins
—
Door lock cylinders Lock oil
—
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft
MERCON威
Multi-Purpose
(ATF)
Transmission
Fluid /
XT-2-QDX
—
—
Motorcraft
Premium Long
Life Grease /
XG-1-C
—
Motorcraft SAE
5W-30 Super
Premium Motor
Oil /
XO-5W30-QSP
Motorcraft
Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant /
XL-1
229
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Lubrication
type
Component
Door window
regulators
NGLI #2
multipurpose
lithium complex
grease
Weatherstripping
Silicone lubricant
Master cylinder
Viscosity /
Ambient
temperature /
Notes
—
—
Engine oil
Refer to engine operator manual
Brake fluid
DOT 3,
—
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Equivalent
Ford part
name / number
Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose
Grease Spray /
XL-5 or
Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose
Grease / XG-4
Motorcraft
Silicone Spray /
XL-6
High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid, PM-1-C
(U.S.) or
CPM-1-C
(Canada)
REFILL CAPACITIES
Rear axle
Axle code
S135–S
4S150–S
17060S
Weight capacity
Description
- lb. (kg)
13500 (6123)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
15500 (7031)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
17500 (7938)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
230
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fluid capacity pints (liters)1,2
24.5 (11.6)
24.5 (11.6)
28.0 (13.2)
Maintenance and Specifications
Axle code
19055T
M190T
19060S
21060S
21060D
M210T
23090S
23090D
23082T
Weight capacity
Description
- lb. (kg)
17500 (7938)
Single rear axle,
two-speed
19000 (8618)
Single rear axle,
two-speed
19000 (8618)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
21000 (9525)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
21000 (9525)
Single rear axle,
single reduction
with
driver-controlled
locking
differential
21000 (9525)
Single rear axle,
two-speed
23000 (10432) Single rear axle,
single reduction
23000 (10432) Single rear axle,
single reduction
with
driver-controlled
locking
differential
23000 (10432) Single rear axle,
two-speed
Fluid capacity pints (liters)1,2
28.0 (13.2)
35.0 (17.0)
28.0 (13.2)
28.0 (13.2)
28.0 (13.2)
16.0 (33.0)
39.0 (18.5)
39.0 (18.5)
37.0 (17.5)
1
Quantities listed are approximate. Fill axle until the lubricant level is at
the bottom of the filler hole, with the vehicle on level ground.
2
If hubs are removed, add an additional 1.6 pints (0.75L) of axle
lubricant. Add lubricant through the axle vent.
231
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine coolant and oil
Engine type
Caterpillar
Cummins
Engine coolant
(approximate
capacity) *
57.0 pints
(27.0L)
52.0 pints
(24.6L)
Engine oil
(approximate
capacity)
Refer to engine
operator’s
manual.
* Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Power steering system
Steering gear
TAS40
TAS66
Power steering fluid volume
17.6 pints
18.4 pints
Transmission
Description
Pints (Liters)
30.0 (14.2)*
37.6 (17.8)*
12.5 (5.9)
19.5 (9.2)
Allison 2000 Series
Allison 3000 Series
FS-5205A 5–speed manual
FS-5406A/5406N and FS-6406A/FSO–6406A 6–speed
manuals
ES56–7B/ES066–7B 7–speed manual
22.0 (10.4)
*Total fluid capacity (dry transmission and torque converter).
Air conditioner refrigerant - r134a
Lb. (Kg)
2.50 (1.13)
Oz.
40
Note: This system uses PAG-type refrigerant oil.
Refrigerant fitting torque
Captured washer nut: 170–190 inch lb. (19–21 N•m)
Note: This system uses mineral based refrigerant oil to lubricate o-rings
and fittings.
232
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel tanks
Standard tanks are listed as such; all other tanks available for your
vehicle are optional equipment.
Vehicle
F-650 Low Profile (standard),
F-650 Dock Height
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height (standard), F-750 Pick-up
and Delivery (standard), F-750
Severe Service (standard)
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height, F-750 Pick-up and
Delivery, F-750 Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height, F-750 Pick-up and
Delivery, F-750 Severe Service
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height, F-750 Pick-up and
Delivery, F-750 Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
Tank type
Single, steel
rectangular
Single, steel
rectangular
Gallons (Liters)
35 (132)
Single, steel
rectangular
50 (189)
Single, steel
rectangular
65 (246)
Single, steel
D-style
65 (246)
Single, steel
D-style
80 (302)
Dual, steel
rectangular
25(LH)/45(RH)
(95[LH]/170[RH])
Dual, steel
rectangular
Dual, steel
rectangular
35(RH)/45(LH)
(132[RH]/170[LH])
45/45 (170/170)
Dual, steel
D-style
50/50 (189/189)
45 (170)
233
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height, F-750 Pick-up and
Delivery, F-750 Severe Service
F-650 Low Profile, F-650 Dock
Height, F-750 Pick-up and
Delivery, F-750 Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
F-650 Dock Height, F-750
Pick-up and Delivery, F-750
Severe Service
Tank type
Dual, steel
rectangular
Gallons (Liters)
45(RH)/65(LH)
(170[RH]/246[LH])
Dual, steel
rectangular
65/65 (246/246)
Dual, steel
D-style
65/65 (246/246)
Dual, steel
D-style
65 (LH)/80 (RH)
(246[LH]/302[RH])
Dual, steel
D-style
80/80 (302/302)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is printed on the Vehicle Rating Decal attached to the vehicle
on the edge of the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The VIN also serves as the
warranty number. If you ever find it necessary to communicate with Ford
Motor Company about your vehicle, always include the VIN in your
communication.
234
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
The general maintenance services listed in this section are required
because they are considered essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle. Refer to the “Daily Owner Checks” chart for important
maintenance items.
Ford Motor Company recommends you perform the owner maintenance
services listed in this section. These services are matters of day-to-day
care that are important to the proper operation of your vehicle. In
addition to the conditions described in owner maintenance, be alert for
any unusual noise, vibration or other indication that your vehicle may
need service and attend to it promptly.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s
important to rely upon your Ford dealership to properly diagnose and
repair your vehicle.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and
built for best performance in your vehicle. Using these parts for
replacement is your assurance that Ford-Built quality stays in your
vehicle.
Non-Ford approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory
recommended maintenance. In fact, Ford Motor Company recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically
recommended by Ford for a particular application.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
The maintenance or replacement of the emission control devices (or
systems) in your new Ford Motor Company vehicle (or engine) may be
performed at your expense. These services may be performed by any
automotive repair establishment or individual using automotive parts
equivalent to those with which your vehicle or engine was originally
equipped. If any parts other than Ford, Motorcraft, or Ford authorized,
235
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
remanufactured parts are used for maintenance replacements (or for the
service) of components effecting the emission control, the owner should
be ensured that such parts are warranted by their manufacturer to be
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company Parts in performance and
durability. Please consult your warranty information booklet for complete
warranty information.
Authorized dealer maintenance
Your authorized dealer specializes in knowing all about Ford Motor
Company vehicles rather than knowing a little about all makes.
There are Ford or Ford of Canada dealer service shops ready to serve
you wherever you drive in the U.S. or Canada. They stock Ford and
Motorcraft parts, and Ford Chemicals and lubricants. You can be
confident that these meet the same exacting design and quality
standards as those used to build the vehicle originally. Dealer Service
Technicians have available training in the latest product developments
and service techniques.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic of
the chemical compound and in itself does not demonstrate that a fluid
needs to be changed. Oils and fluids identified in the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide chapter should be changed at the specified interval
or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid
for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance and should
only be done using the same fluid required to finish the maintenance
procedure, or a Ford approved flushing chemical.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
You can do much of the maintenance your vehicle requires yourself, if
you have the time and a reasonable amount of mechanical ability. If you
prefer to have this work done professionally, your authorized dealer
stands ready to help you.
All mechanical components and attachments are important in that they
could affect the performance of vital components and systems. If
replacement becomes necessary, they must be replaced with parts having
the same part number or with equivalent parts. Torque values of the
attaching parts must be used as specified during any reassembly
procedure to ensure proper retention.
236
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
FACTORY AUTHORIZED SYSTEMS CHECKS
In the event that your vehicle experiences a component related concern,
please contact your Ford dealership. The Ford Motor Company Trained
Technicians who work at Ford dealerships are specifically trained to
understand your vehicle.
A proper repair begins with a thorough system check. A Factory
Authorized Systems Check can ONLY be found at a Ford dealership. In
some circumstances, the technician may need to request your
authorization to perform additional operations to determine the final
diagnosis. The technician’s goal is to ensure that your vehicle is fixed
right the first time, at the best value to you.
The following list represents several of the Factory Authorized Systems
Checks available at a participating Ford dealers:
• Air Conditioning
• Check Engine Light
• All Wheel Drive and 4x4
• Automatic Transmission
• Engine Cooling and Cabin Heating
• Steering and Suspension
• Charge/Start/Battery
• Wheel Alignment
• Anti-Lock Brake System
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM
To ensure the emissions control systems operate effectively, you should
have the services listed in the maintenance schedule performed at the
specified time and mileage/km intervals. You should avoid running out of
fuel or turning off the ignition while the vehicle is in motion, especially
at high speeds.
WARNING: Because of high engine compartment and exhaust
system temperatures resulting from emissions equipment, do not
park, idle or operate your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground
cover where the possibility of ground fire exists.
Do not make unauthorized modifications to the engine or vehicle.
Modifications causing increased amounts of unburned fuel to reach the
exhaust system can significantly increase the temperature of the engine
compartment and/or the exhaust system.
237
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Avoid driving your vehicle if it does not operate properly. If the engine
diesels (more than five seconds of engine run-on after shut-off), misfires,
surges, stalls or backfires, see your dealer. Be alert for fluid leakage,
odor, smoke, loss of oil pressure, or charge indicator or over temperature
warning.
Do NOT use diesel fuel blended with waste oil in engines equipped with
a catalytic converter-muffler. Waste lube oil blending in fuel will plug the
catalytic converter-muffler, resulting in a significant loss of engine power.
Emissions control system(s) laws
Federal law prohibits vehicle manufacturers, dealers and other persons
engaged in the business of repairing, servicing, selling, leasing or trading
motor vehicles, as well as fleet operators from knowingly removing or
rendering an emissions control device or system inoperative. Further,
modifications of the emissions control system(s) could create liability on
the part of individual owners under the laws of some states. In Canada,
modification of the emissions control system could create liability under
applicable Federal or Provincial laws.
NOISE EMISSIONS WARRANTY, PROHIBITED TAMPERING ACTS
AND MAINTENANCE
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulations became effective governing the
noise emissions on trucks over 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg) GVWR. The
following statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance and the noise warranty are found in the Warranty Guide,
and are applicable to completed trucks.
Tampering with noise control system prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof: (1) The
removal or rendering inoperative, by any person other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control
prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use,
or (2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has
been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
238
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the following
acts listed:
Vehicle System
Acoustical Shielding
Engine
Engine Air Induction System
Exhaust System
Engine Cooling System
Acts
Removal of noise shields, hood
blanket, tunnel liner or acoustical
absorptive material.
Removal or rendering inoperative
the engine speed governor so as to
allow engine speed to exceed
manufacturer specifications.
Removal of engine mounted noise
shield or oil pan enclosure.
Removal of the air duct, silencer,
air cleaner, and/or air cleaner
element and baffle in air cleaner;
re-indexing of air cleaner.
Removal or rendering inoperative
exhaust system components
including the catalytic converter muffler assembly, inlet pipe, outlet
pipe, resonator and flexpipe.
Rotation of horizontal exhaust
system directional outlet pipe to
cause the exhaust to be emitted in
a direction other than the
orientation the vehicle was
originally produced with.
Removal or rendering inoperative
the fan clutch. Removal or
modification of the fan shroud.
Replacing a fixed fan with a fan of
increased diameter, different
number of blades or different pitch
width.
239
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
MAINTENANCE
Instructions for maintenance and service of the noise control system
have been included in the required maintenance services and in the
general maintenance section. To further help minimize noise emissions
degradation throughout the life of the vehicle, Ford Motor Company
recommends that this vehicle should be operated in the manner
described within this Owner Guide. Caution should be exercised by the
owner when installing replacement parts to be sure that a tampering act
(as outlined above) is not committed. Note any inspection and service
performed in the Maintenance Record.
EMISSIONS INFORMATION LABEL
Emissions information appears on the Important Engine Information
decal located on or near the engine.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES
Maintenance service adjustments must conform to specifications
contained in this manual, and those shown on the Important Engine
Information decal. The following services are to be performed at
scheduled intervals because they are considered essential to the life and
performance of your vehicle. Ford recommends that you perform
maintenance on all designated items to achieve best vehicle operation.
Maintenance intervals are provided for three types of general vehicle
environments: On-Highway, City and Severe Service. In all applications,
the actual interval is determined by monitoring kilometers (miles) and
time and when the engine is due for an oil change. When the engine oil
change is required prior to the truck lubrication interval, it is
recommended that the lubrication be performed at the same time in
order to reduce your vehicle’s time out of service.
• On-Highway: 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or more annually.
• City: 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or less annually.
• Severe Service: 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or less annually on/off
road in dirty conditions.
Scheduled maintenance beyond 100,000 miles (160,000 km) should be
continued as before 100,000 miles (160,000 km).
240
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
AIR BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Failure to maintain proper air brake adjustment can
result in reduction or loss of braking ability.
Air brake inspection and adjustment or repairs should be performed by a
qualified service technician in accordance with the instructions in the
service manual.
Cam brakes - automatic slack adjusters
Inspect standard air brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters for
proper brake adjustment as per scheduled maintenance information.
However, more frequent inspection is required if your vehicle’s brakes
are subjected to heavy use or adverse operating conditions such as:
• Frequent brake applications while fully loaded.
• Operation on hilly or mountainous terrain.
• Frequent operation on dirt, gravel or mud.
Some aftermarket brake linings also require more frequent inspections.
WARNING: Do not manually adjust the automatic slack
adjusters to correct excessive push rod stroke as it may result in
reduced brake effectiveness and a vehicle crash. Excessive push rod
stroke indicates that a problem exists with the automatic adjuster, with
the installation of the adjuster, or with foundation brake components
that manual adjustment will not remedy. Seek service from a qualified
facility for excessive push rod stroke.
241
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
242
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IMPORTANT — This document should remain with the vehicle at all times.
Warranty
Start Date ______________________________________ Engine Displacement ______________________________________
Vehicle
Identification
Number _________________________________________ Owner Name ___________________________________________
Maintenance Record
The maintenance record form which follows is for your convenience. In addition to recording the services performed, you should
retain copies of your receipts for the services. You also should keep records of any emission control systems maintenance
services performed on your vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SERVICES AND RECORD RETENTION
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE GUIDE
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Daily owner checks
Check the air filter restriction gauge.
Check the engine oil.
Inspect the coolant level
Brake system
Check the air brake system reservoir
automatic drain valve operation.
Drain the air brake system reservoir manual valve.
Transmission system
Visually check the automatic
transmission for fluid leakage.
Steering system
Check the power steering pump fluid
level and check the system for leaks.
Check the entire vehicle for evidence
of fluid leaks.
Check the service brakes.
U.S. Department of
Transportation, Federal
Check the parking brake.
Highway Administration
Check the steering mechanism.
requirements (ensure that
Check the lighting devices and
the entire system is
reflectors.
functioning properly)
Check the tires.
Check the horn.
Check the windshield wipers.
Check the rear vision mirrors.
Check the wheels and rims.
Check the emergency equipment.
Engine
243
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Check every oil change
Check the engine cooling system hoses, clamps and protection*.
Inspect the drive belts.
Exhaust system
Inspect the entire exhaust system
(including the inlet pipe(s),
muffler(s), outlet pipe(s), clamps and
fasteners) for holes, leakage,
breakage, corrosive damage and
separation from other components.
Adjust, service or replace with the
same or the equivalent part. (Also a
noise emission control service).
Suspension system
Tighten the front and rear spring
U-bolts to the specified torque.
Driveline and rear axle
Lubricate the U-joints and the slip
system
yoke.
Brake system
Lube the air brake foot control valve,
hinge and roller.
Inspect the drum brake linings
through the inspection holes.
Lubricate rear caliper slide rails.
Lubricate the brake camshafts (air
brakes only).
Lubricate the brake slack adjuster (air
brakes only).
Inspect the disc brake pads and the
piston boots (hydraulic brakes only).
Clutch system
Lubricate the clutch release cross
shaft and all linkages.
Check the clutch fluid.
Fuel system
Drain the accumulated water or
sediment from the fuel tank(s).
Engine system
244
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Check every oil change
Lubricate the steering shaft(s),
U-joints and splines when equipped
with grease fittings.
Lubricate the front axle spindle pins.
Lubricate the steering linkage when
equipped with grease fittings.
Grease the power steering gear output
shaft.
* Coolant protection checks should be made just prior to the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable. If coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with the
prescribed solution of cooling system fluid and water. Use only
permanent type coolant that meets specifications as listed in your
engine operator’s manual. See the engine manufacturer’s operating
guide for supplemental corrosion inhibitor specifications.
Steering system
In addition to the items to be performed daily or at each oil change, the
following need to be completed as specified:
GENERAL MAINTENANCE SERVICES
The following are vehicle checks that should be made periodically either
by the owner or a qualified technician. It is recommended that
deficiencies be brought to the attention of your dealer or another
qualified service outlet as soon as possible in order that advice regarding
the need for service or replacement can be obtained.
Maintenance Operation
Inspect the automatic slack
adjuster function
Check the operation of the
brakes, the clutch, and the
steering (1),(2)
Inspect the vehicle for missing,
damaged, or mislocated noise
shields
Frequency - Observation
Insufficient power shown in loaded
practice stop.
Vehicle handling qualities not up to
par.
Excessive noise emanates from under
the cab or engine compartment.
245
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Operation
Check the engine performance
and the engine governor
Inspect the fan, the fan shroud,
and the fan clutch
Check for operation of ABS
warning lamp
Inspect the entire exhaust
system (including inlet pipe,
muffler, outlet pipe and all
exhaust clamps and fasteners)
for holes, leakage, breakage,
looseness and corrosive
damage
Inspect the engine air
induction system (including the
air ducts and the air filter) for
loose fitting, damaged or
missing components
Inspect the tires and check the
air pressure (3)
Balance the wheels and the
tires
Check the front end alignment
(3)
Check the transmission and
engine mountings (2)
Check and adjust transmission
controls (2)
Check fuel pump pressure
Clean radiator cap seal. Clean
and inspect the cap surface on
the radiator
Frequency - Observation
Excessive engine noise.
Engine overheats, fan runs at high
speed constantly, excessive fan noise,
or fan wobble due to worn bearings.
At each engine start up.
Excessive noise or the smell of fumes
is experienced.
Excessive noise emanates from the
engine compartment.
Poor steering, wandering or excessive
tire wear.
Vibration or abnormal tire wear
indicates imbalance.
Poor steering, wandering or excessive
tire wear.
Hard shifting or excessive vibration.
High effort to shift or noisy
transmission.
Insufficient full-throttle power or
backfiring.
When the cap does not hold pressure.
246
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Operation
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion
Tighten the wheel mounting
nuts to the specified torque.
Refer to Wheels in the
Maintenance and
Specifications chapter
Clean body/door drain holes
Clean windshield wiper blades
Replace windshield wiper
blades
Lubricate body lock cylinders
Check headlamp alignment
Frequency - Observation
Whenever electrical power supply has
diminished.
Required initially at 500 and
1000 miles (800 and 1600 km).
Perform again at 500 and 1000 mile
(800 and 1600 km) intervals after
each tire removal/replacement.
At least twice annually.
As required.
If wiping the blades with a clean cloth
and mild detergent and washing with
a cleaner does not restore a clean
wipe.
Noisy or difficult to operate.
Lamp beams in wrong position when
vehicle operating loaded.
If washes do not spray when operated.
Check windshield washer fluid
level; add fluid if required
1
- During maintenance and repair, protect the fuel tube and the hose
assemblies, the power steering lines, and the brake lines from the
external heat, the acids and the abrasion that could damage the lines.
2
- Check for (free) linkage action and ensure that (return) spring
force is adequate to maintain pedal free play.
3
- Adjust, repair or replace as required with the same or equivalent
parts.
247
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
15
30
45
60
75
90 105 120 135
Kilometers (x 1000)
24
48
72
96 120 144 168 192 216
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
•
•
Tie rod ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park brake relay lever / linkage - lubricate
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change fluid
•
Power steering filter - replacement
Five years or 500,000 miles (800,000 km)
Steering gear Ross TAS - output shaft - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joint - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
248
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
150
240
30
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
15
30
45
60
75
90 105 120 135 150
Kilometers (x 1000)
24
48
72
96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Driveshaft SPL
U-joint - lubricate
Every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first
Driveshaft non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 10,000–15,000 miles (16,000–24,000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / forks - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - Refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmissions
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
change
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
249
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
15
30
45
60
75
90 105 120 135 150
Kilometers (x 1000)
24
48
72
96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - synthetic oil
Factory fill w/synthetic at 500,000 miles (800,000 km);
change
Converted to synthetic at 250,000 miles (400,000 km)
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer petroleum oil - change
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer synthetic oil - change
Factory fill w/synthetic at 500,000 miles (800,000 km);
Converted to synthetic at 250,000 miles (400,000 km) or three
years
Cab components
Door hinges / Latches / Strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
250
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285
Kilometers (x 1000)
264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
•
•
Tie rod ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park brake relay level / linkage - lubricate
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change level
•
•
Power steering filter - replacement
Five years or 500,000 miles (800,000 km)
Steering gear Ross TAS - output seal - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joint - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
300
480
60
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
251
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300
Kilometers (x 1000)
264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456 480
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Driveshaft SPL
U-joint - lubricate
Every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first
Driveshaft non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 10,000–15,000 miles (16,000–24,000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / fork - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - Refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmissions
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
•
change
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
252
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ON-HIGHWAY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR MORE ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300
Kilometers (x 1000)
264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456 480
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - synthetic oil
Factory fill w/synthetic at 500,000 miles (800,000 km);
change
Converted to synthetic at 250,000 miles (400,000 km)
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer petroleum oil - change
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer synthetic oil - change
Factory fill w/synthetic at 500,000 miles (800,000 km);
Converted to synthetic at 250,000 miles (400,000 km) or three
years
Cab components
Door hinges / Latches / Strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
253
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Kilometers (x 1000)
16
32
48
64
80
96 112 128 144
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
Tie rod ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park brake relay lever / linkage - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change fluid
•
•
Power steering filter - replacement
Five years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Steering gear Ross TAS - output seal - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joint - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
254
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
100
160
30
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Kilometers (x 1000)
16
32
48
64
80
96 112 128 144 160
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Driveshaft SPL
U-joint - lubricate
Every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or six months, whichever comes
first
Driveshaft non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 5,000–8,000 miles (8,000 km-12,800 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / fork - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmissions
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
change
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
255
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Kilometers (x 1000)
16
32
48
64
80
96 112
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer petroleum oil - change
•
Cab components
Door hinges / latches / strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
90
144
27
80
128
24
•
•
100
160
30
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
256
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190
Kilometers (x 1000)
176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
Tie rode ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park brake relay lever / linkage - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change fluid
•
•
Power steering filter - replacement
Five years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Steering gear Ross TAS - output seal - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joint - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
200
320
60
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
257
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
Kilometers (x 1000)
176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Driveshaft SPL
U-joint - lubricate
Every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or six months, whichever comes
first
Driveshaft non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 5,000–8,000 miles (8,000 km-12,800 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / fork - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmission
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
change
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
258
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CITY - 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR LESS ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
110 120 130 140 150 160 170
Kilometers (x 1000)
176 192 208 224 240 256 272
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - synthetic oil
•
change
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer petroleum oil - change
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer synthetic oil - change
•
Cab components
Door hinges / latches / strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
190
304
57
180
288
54
•
•
200
320
60
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
259
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Kilometers (x 1000)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
Tie rod ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check fluid level
•
•
•
Park brake relay lever / linkage - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change fluid
•
•
Steering gear Ross TAS - output seal - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joints - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
260
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driveshaft - non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 5,000–8,000 miles (8,000–12,800 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / forks
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmissions
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
change
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Kilometers (x 1000)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Driveshaft - SPL
Slip joint - inspect boot
Every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or six months, whichever comes
first
U-joint - lubricate
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
261
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Kilometers (x 1000)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer - petroleum oil change
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer - synthetic oil change
•
•
Cab components
Door hinges / latches / strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
262
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100
Kilometers (x 1000)
88
96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Non-driving front axle
Wheel bearing - oil type - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - oil type - change oil
•
•
•
Wheel bearing - grease type - repack
•
•
•
Tie rod ends - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drag link - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
King pin and bushing - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - air
Slack adjusters - lubricate
•
•
•
S-cam - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake system - hydraulic
Master cylinder - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park brake relay lever / linkage - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering
Power steering fluid - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power steering fluid - change fluid
•
•
•
Power steering filter - replacement
•
Steering gear Ross TAS - output seal - lubricate
•
•
•
Steering column u-joints / slip joint - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
263
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100
Kilometers (x 1000)
88
96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Driveshaft SPL
Slip joint - inspect boot
Every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or six months, whichever comes
first
U-joint - lubricate
Driveshaft non-SPL
U-joint and slip joint - lubricate
Every 5,000–8,000 miles (8,000–12,800 km) or three months,
whichever comes first
Clutch
Release bearing / shafts / fork - lubricate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling system
Coolant - check level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coolant - check freeze protection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extended life coolant - add extender
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Extended life coolant - replace
See engine manufacturer’s recommendation
Engine - refer to your engine operator’s manual
Transmission
Automatic and Auto-shift transmissions
Refer to transmission operator’s manual
Manual transmission - check fluid level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - petroleum oil
•
•
•
change
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
264
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEVERE SERVICE - ON/OFF ROAD IN DIRTY CONDITIONS OR 20,000 MILES (32,000 KM) OR LESS
ANNUALLY (Continued)
(Miles, kilometers or months - whichever occurs first)
Miles (x 1000)
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100
Kilometers (x 1000)
88
96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
Months
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
•
•
Eaton-Fuller manual transmission - synthetic oil
change
Rear axle
Fluid level - check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer petroleum oil - change
•
•
•
Eaton / Dana / Spicer synthetic oil - change
•
•
Cab components
Door hinges / latches / strikers - lubricate, check link
•
•
•
Door lock cylinders - lubricate
•
•
•
Seat adjuster slides - lubricate
•
•
•
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
265
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
266
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
267
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
268
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#:
269
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
A
Air conditioning ..........................47
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................47
Air suspension ...........................120
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................118
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................33, 35, 40
Automatic transmission ............122
fluid, adding ............................199
fluid, checking ........................199
fluid, refill capacities ..............232
fluid, specification ..................218
Auxiliary power point .................55
Axle ............................131, 171, 204
lubricant specifications ..........218
refill capacities ........................230
B
Battery .......................................180
charging system warning
light ............................................22
jumping a disabled battery ....151
voltage gauge ............................28
Belt-Minder威 ...............................75
Booster seats ...............................87
Brakes ..........................99, 104, 172
adjustment ..............................174
anti-lock ...................................118
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light .....................22, 118
brake warning light ..................22
fluid, checking and
adding ..............................175, 196
fluid, specifications .................218
parking ....................100, 107, 175
Bulbs ............................................51
C
Catalytic converter
(see Emission control) .............175
CD-single premium .....................33
Cell phone use ..............................6
Child safety seats ........................83
attaching with tether straps ....86
in front seat ..............................84
in rear seat ..........................84, 86
recommendations .....................81
tether anchorage hardware .....86
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................87
Cleaning your vehicle
chrome and aluminum
parts .........................................165
engine compartment ..............165
exterior ....................................167
instrument panel ....................166
interior .....................................166
interior trim ............................166
plastic parts ............................165
washing ....................................164
waxing .....................................164
wheels ......................................165
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......46–47
Clutch ................................125, 197
adjusting ..................................198
fluid ..........................................197
operation while driving ..........125
specifications ..........................218
Controls
power seat .................................66
270
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
Coolant ......................................183
refill capacities ........................232
specifications ..........................218
temperature gauge ...................28
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................59
Customer Assistance ........142, 159
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................167
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ......159, 161
Getting roadside assistance ...142
Getting the service you
need .........................................159
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................162
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................49
Defrost ...................................46–47
windshield ...........................46–47
with heating and air
conditioning system .................47
with standard heating
system .......................................46
Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) ........................................190
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........218
Driving under special
conditions
through water ...........................96
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................151
Emission control system ..194, 237
catalytic converter ..................175
Engine
cleaning ...................................165
coolant .....................................183
idle shutdown ...........................96
lubrication specifications .......218
Engine fan .................................184
Engine oil ..................................180
oil pressure gauge ....................28
refill capacities ........................232
specifications ..........................218
Event data recording ....................6
F
Fan, Engine Cooling .................184
Flashers, hazard ........................143
Fuel ............................................184
calculating fuel economy .......188
capacity ...................................233
choosing the right fuel ...........185
filling your vehicle with fuel ..184
filter, specifications ................184
gauge .........................................28
improving fuel economy ........188
running out of fuel ...........94, 187
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................184
Fuses ..................................143, 151
G
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................188
Gauges .........................................28
battery voltage gauge ...............28
engine coolant temperature
gauge .........................................28
engine oil pressure gauge ........28
fuel gauge ..................................28
271
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
odometer ...................................28
speedometer .............................28
tachometer ................................28
trip odometer ............................28
L
Ignition .........................................91
chime .........................................22
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................51
cargo lamps ...............................50
daytime running light ...............49
headlamps .................................49
high beams ................................49
instrument panel, dimming .....50
interior lamps ...........................51
replacing bulbs ...................51–53
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................50
Lights, warning and indicator ....22
air suspension ...........................22
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....22, 118
brake ..........................................22
charging system ........................22
safety belt .................................22
service engine soon ..................22
traction control off ...................22
turn signal indicator .................22
Locks
childproof ..................................64
Lubricant specifications ...........218
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..83
M
H
Hazard flashers .........................143
Headlamps ...................................49
aiming ........................................50
daytime running lights .............49
high beam .................................49
warning chime ..........................22
Heating ..................................46–47
heater only system ...................46
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................47
Hood ..........................................177
I
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................166
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................50
J
Manual transmission .................126
lubricant specifications ..........218
Mirrors .........................................57
fold away ...................................59
heated ........................................58
side view mirrors (power) .......58
Jump-starting your vehicle ......151
O
K
Odometer .....................................28
Keys
key in ignition chime ...............22
positions of the ignition ...........91
272
P
Paint chips, repairing ...............164
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
Parking brake ....................100, 107
warning light .............................22
Power door locks ........................64
Power mirrors .............................58
Power point .................................55
Power steering ..........................177
fluid, checking and adding ....195
fluid, refill capacity ................232
fluid, specifications .................218
Power Take-Off (PTO)
operation .................................129
Power Windows ...........................56
R
Radio ................................33, 35, 40
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................81
Relays ........................................144
Remote entry system
locking/unlocking doors ...........64
Roadside assistance ..................142
Safety seats for children ............83
Scheduled Maintenance
Guide .........................................235
General Maintenance
Information .............................235
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............69
Seats ............................................65
child safety seats ......................83
heated ........................................67
Special notice ................................5
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................218
Speed control ..............................59
Speedometer ...............................28
Starting your vehicle ..................91
jump starting ..........................151
preparing to start your
vehicle .......................................91
Steering .....................................176
Steering wheel
controls ................................54, 59
tilting .........................................54
Suspension ........................120, 202
S
T
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...69–70, 72
Safety defects, reporting ..162–163
Safety restraints ..............69–70, 72
Belt-Minder威 .............................75
cleaning the safety belts ..........74
extension assembly ..................74
for adults .............................70, 72
for children ...............................79
lap belt ......................................71
warning light and chime .........22,
74–75
Tachometer .................................28
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ...........46–47
Tires ...........................................210
Towing
wrecker ....................................155
Traction control
off light ......................................22
Transmission .....................122, 126
automatic operation ...............122
273
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................199
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................200
fluid, refill capacities ..............232
lubricant specifications ..........218
manual operation ....................126
Turn signal ..................................50
V
Vehicle loading ..................136–137
Voltmeter
(see Battery voltage gauge) ......28
W
Warning chimes ...........................22
Warning lights (see Lights) .......22
Warranty coverage ........................5
Washer fluid ..............................179
Washing your vehicle ................164
Water, Driving through ...............96
Waxing your vehicle .................164
Wheels .......................................205
Windows
power .........................................56
Windshield
defrosting ............................46–47
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................54
checking and cleaning ............166
operation ...................................54
replacing wiper blades ...........180
Wrecker towing .........................155
274
2010 F-650/750 (f67)
Supplement (supplement), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement